User's Manual

ManualsBrandsMitsubishi Electronics ManualsPortable Multimedia PlayerMitsubishi Electronics Mitsubishi Digital Electronics Portable Multimedia Player GOT1000

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

BUS CONNECTION

BUS CONNECTION

DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU

DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU

COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION

COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION

ETHERNET CONNECTION

ETHERNET CONNECTION

MELSECNET/H CONNECTION

MELSECNET/H CONNECTION

MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION

MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION

CC-Link IE CONNECTION

CC-Link IE CONNECTION

CC-Link CONNECTION

CC-Link CONNECTION

INVERTER CONNECTION

INVERTER CONNECTION

SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION

SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION

ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION

ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION

CNC CONNECTION

CNC CONNECTION

GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION

MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION

MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION

MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION

FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION

FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION

BUS CONNECTION

DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU

COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION

ETHERNET CONNECTION

MELSECNET/H CONNECTION

MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION

CC-Link IE CONNECTION

CC-Link CONNECTION

INVERTER CONNECTION

SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION

ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION

CNC CONNECTION

GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION

MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION

FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION

Series

(Mitsubishi Products)

Connection Manual

for GT Works3 (ELE)

Summary of content (754 pages)

PAGE 1
Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 (ELE) BUS CONNECTION DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION ETHERNET CONNECTION MELSECNET/H CONNECTION MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION CC-Link IE CONNECTION CC-Link CONNECTION INVERTER CONNECTION SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION CNC CONNECTION GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Always read these precautions before using this equipment.) Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly. The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product. In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
PAGE 4
[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS] WARNING ● Incorrect operation of the touch switch(s) may lead to a serious accident if the GOT backlight is gone out. When the GOT backlight goes out, the display section dims, while the input of the touch switch(s) remains active. This may confuse an operator in thinking that the GOT is in "screensaver" mode, who then tries to release the GOT from this mode by touching the display section, which may cause a touch switch to operate.
PAGE 5
[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS] WARNING ● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT to/from the panel. Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction. ● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the communication unit, option function board or multi-color display board onto/from the GOT. Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.
PAGE 6
[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION ● When inserting/removing a CF card into/from the GOT(GT16, GT15, GT11), turn the CF card access switch off in advance. Failure to do so may corrupt data within the CF card. ● When removing a SD card from the GOT(GT14), make sure to support the SD card by hand, as it may pop out. Failure to do so may cause the SD card to drop from the GOT and break. ● When removing a CF card from the GOT, make sure to support the CF card by hand, as it may pop out.
PAGE 7
[WIRING PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION ● Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the product. Not doing so can cause a fire or failure. ● Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT.
PAGE 8
[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS] WARNING ● When power is on, do not touch the terminals. Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction. ● Correctly connect the battery connector. Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder, or throw the battery into the fire. Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat, explode, or ignite, resulting in injury and fire. ● Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening, always switch off the power externally in all phases.
PAGE 9
[TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION ● For the analog-resistive film type touch panels, normally the adjustment is not required. However, the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use elapses. When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, execute the touch panel calibration. ● When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, other object may be activated.
PAGE 10
[TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION ● When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations. (For details on models subject to restrictions, refer to the User's Manual for the GOT you are using.) ● Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and/or relevant unit(s) in the manner they will not be exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of the User's Manual, as they are precision devices.
PAGE 11
INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal (Mitsubishi GOT). Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly in advance to ensure correct use. CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .........................................................................................................................A - 1 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................
PAGE 12
MITSUBISHI PLC CONNECTIONS 2.DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.1 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700........................................................................... 2 - 8 2.2 MELSEC-L ....................................................................................................................................... 2 - 9 2.3 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 * ............................................................................................. 2 - 10 2.4 MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion ....
PAGE 13
4.8.4 4.9 CC-Link connection (Via G4) (Connection to the CC-Link module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) ..... 4 - 28 Q Redundant Setting ..................................................................................................................... 4 - 29 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function ................................. 4 - 31 4.10.1 Method for using the station number switching function...................................................
PAGE 14
6.3 Connection Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 22 6.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 22 6.3.2 RS-422 cable ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 23 6.4 GOT Side Settings ................................................
PAGE 15
8.4.2 8.4.3 8.4.4 8.4.5 8.4.6 8.4.7 8.4.8 8.4.9 8.4.10 8.5 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU (multiple connection) ......................................... 8 - 22 Connecting to Ethernet module (Q/L Series)...................................................................... 8 - 24 Connecting to C Controller module .................................................................................... 8 - 27 Connecting to Ethernet module (QnA Series) ...................................................
PAGE 16
11.CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................. 11 - 2 11.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU................................................................................................. 11 - 2 11.1.2 CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit............................................................ 11 - 6 11.2 System Configuration ..............................
PAGE 17
14.CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................. 14 - 2 14.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU ................................................................................................ 14 - 2 14.1.2 CC-Link module/peripheral module .................................................................................... 14 - 5 14.2 System Configuration ..................................
PAGE 18
15.5.12 Station number setting...................................................................................................... 15 - 43 15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set .................................................................................................... 15 - 44 15.7 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 15 - 47 16.SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.1 Connectable Model List .........
PAGE 19
18.4 GOT Side Settings......................................................................................................................... 18 - 8 18.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 18 - 8 18.4.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 18 - 8 18.4.3 Ethernet setting ..................................................................................
PAGE 20
MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.1 What is Multi-channel Function?.................................................................................................... 21 - 2 21.2 System Configuration .................................................................................................................... 21 - 4 21.2.1 Bus connection and serial connection ................................................................................ 21 - 4 21.2.
PAGE 21
22.6.12 22.6.13 22.6.14 22.6.15 22.6.16 22.7 Accessing by RT ToolBox2 .............................................................................................. 22 - 61 Accessing by NC Configurator ......................................................................................... 22 - 63 Accessing by MELSOFT Navigator .................................................................................. 22 - 63 Accessing by LCPU Logging Configuration Tool.............................................
PAGE 22
MANUALS The following table lists the manual relevant to this product. Refer to each manual for any purpose.
PAGE 23
 GT16 manuals Packaging Manual Number (Model code) GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) Stored in CD-ROM SH-080928ENG (1D7MD3) GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) Stored in CD-ROM SH-080929ENG (1D7MD4) GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM JY997D41201 JY997D41202 (09R821) Packaging Manual Number (Model code) Stored in CD-ROM SH-080528ENG (1D7M23) Packaging Manual Number (Model code) Stored in CD-ROM JY997D44801 (09R823) Packaging Manual Number (Model code) Stored in CD-ROM SH-080977EN
PAGE 24
QUICK REFERENCE  Creating a project Obtaining the specifications and operation methods of GT Designer3 Setting available functions on GT Designer3 Creating a screen displayed on the GOT GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2 Obtaining useful functions to increase efficiency of drawing Setting details for figures and objects Setting functions for the data collection or trigger action GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) 1/2, 2/2 Setting functions to use per
PAGE 25
 Others Obtaining specifications (including part names, external dimensions, and • GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) options) of each GOT • GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual • GT15 User's Manual • GT14 User's Manual • GT12 User's Manual Installing the GOT • GT11 User's Manual • GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual • GT10 User's Manual • GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) • GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual • GT15 User's Manual Operating the utility • GT14 User's Manual • GT12 User's Manual • GT11 User's Manual • GT11 Han
PAGE 26
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS  GOT Abbreviations and generic terms GT1695M-X Abbreviation of GT1695M-XTBA, GT1695M-XTBD GT1685 GT1685M-S Abbreviation of GT1685M-STBA, GT1685M-STBD GT1675M-S Abbrevuation GT1575-STBA, GT1575-STBD GT1675 GT1672 GT1665 GT1675M-V Abbreviation of GT1675M-VTBA, GT1675M-VTBD GT1675-VN Abbreviation of GT1675-VNBA, GT1675-VNBD GT1672-VN Abbreviation of GT1672-VNBA, GT1672-VNBD GT1665M-S Abbreviation of GT1665M-STBA, GT1665M-STBD GT1665M-V Abbreviation of GT1665M
PAGE 27
Abbreviations and generic terms GOT1000 Series Handy GOT GT16 Handy GOT GT11 Handy GOT Description GT1665HS-V Abbreviation of GT1665HS-VTBD GT1155HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1155HS-QSBD GT1150HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1150HS-QLBD GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT1000 GOT900 Series Abbreviation of GOT-A900 Series, GOT-F900 Series GOT800 Series Abbreviation of GOT-800 Series  Communication unit Abbreviations and generic terms Description Bus connection unit GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABU
PAGE 28
 Option Abbreviations and generic terms Memory card CF card SD card Description GT05-MEM-16MC, GT05-MEM-32MC, GT05-MEM-64MC, GT05-MEM-128MC, GT05-MEM-256MC, GT05-MEM-512MC, GT05-MEM-1GC, GT05-MEM-2GC, GT05-MEM-4GC, GT05-MEM-8GC, GT05-MEM-16GC L1MEM-2GBSD, L1MEM-4GBSD Memory card adaptor GT05-MEM-ADPC Option function board GT16-MESB, GT15-FNB, GT15-QFNB, GT15-QFNB16M, GT15-QFNB32M, GT15-QFNB48M, GT11-50FNB, GT15-MESB48M Battery GT15-BAT, GT11-50BAT Protective Sheet Protective cover for oil For G
PAGE 29
 Software Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT Works3 Abbreviation of the SW GT Designer3 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT1000 series DNC-GTWK3-E and SW DNC-GTWK3-EA GT Simulator3 Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT1000/GOT900 series GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000 GT Converter2 Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series GT Designer2 Classic Abbreviation of screen
PAGE 30
 Others Abbreviations and generic terms IAI Description Abbreviation of IAI Corporation AZBIL Abbreviation of Azbil Corporation (former Yamatake Corporation) OMRON Abbreviation of OMRON Corporation KEYENCE Abbreviation of KEYENCE CORPORATION KOYO EI Abbreviation of KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. SHARP Abbreviation of Sharp Manufacturing Systems Corporation JTEKT Abbreviation of JTEKT Corporation SHINKO Abbreviation of Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.
PAGE 31
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL  Symbols Following symbols are used in this manual. BUS CONNECTION Connectable model name Not connectable model name 5.1 Connectable Model List 5-2 Applicable model name Shows GT16. Shows GT15. Shows GT14. Shows GT12. Shows GT11. Shows GT11 (BUS). Shows GT11 (SERIAL). Shows GT10. Shows GT105 ,GT104 . Shows GT1020,GT1030 (input power supply : 24V). Shows GT1020,GT1030 (input power supply : 5V). 1. 2. 3. … Indicates the operation steps. 2.
PAGE 32
 About system configuration The following describes the system configuration of each connection included in this manual. The configuration of equipment connected to GOT is shown. The cable connecting the GOT to the equipment is shown. The configuration of the GOT connected to equipment is shown. For the option devices, refer to the following. 1.
PAGE 33
1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT . . . . . . . . . 1 - 15 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection . . . . . . . . . 1 - 17 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection . . . . . . 1 - 26 1.
PAGE 34
1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections. Setting the communication interface Determine the connection type and channel No. to be used, and perform the communication setting. 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface Each chapter GOT Side Settings Writing the project data and OS Write the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option 1.2.1 Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT 1.2.
PAGE 35
Set the communication interface of GOT and the connected equipment. When using the GOT at the first time, make sure to set the channel of communication interface and the communication driver before writing to GOT. Set the communication interface of the GOT at [Controller Setting] and [I/F Communication Setting] in GT Designer3. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1.
PAGE 36
1.1.1 Setting connected equipment (Channel setting) Set the channel of the equipment connected to the GOT.  Setting 1. Select [Common] 2. The Controller Setting dialog box appears. Select the channel No. to be used from the list menu. 3. Refer to the following explanations for the setting. [Controller Setting] from the menu. POINT Channel No.2 to No.4 Use the channel No.2 to No.4 when using the Multi-channel function. For details of the Multi-channel function, refer to the following.
PAGE 37
1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING  Setting item This section describes the setting items of the Manufacturer, Controller Type, Driver and I/F. When using the channel No.2 to No.4, put a check mark at [Use CH*]. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 Item HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 Description 5 Select this item when setting the channel No.2 to No.4. Manufacturer BUS CONNECTION Use CH* Select the manufacturer of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.
PAGE 38
(2) Setting [Controller Type] The types for the selection differs depending on the PLC to be used. For the settings, refer to the following.
PAGE 39
A373UCPU-S3 A2UCPU-S1 A171SCPU A3UCPU A171SCPU-S3 A4UCPU A171SCPU-S3N MELSEC-A A2ACPUP21 A171SHCPU 2 A171SHCPUN A2ACPUR21 A172SHCPU A2ACPU-S1 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET A2ACPU A172SHCPUN A2ACPUP21-S1 A173UHCPU A2ACPUR21-S1 A173UHCPU-S1 A3ACPU FX0 A3ACPUP21 FX0S A3ACPUR21 3 FX0N A1NCPU ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING FX1 A1NCPUP21 FX2 A1NCPUR21 FX2C A2NCPU FX1S A2NCPUP21 MELSEC-FX A2NCPUR21 FX1N FX2N A2NCPU-S1 4 FX1NC A2NCPUP21-S1 FX2NC A2NCPUR21-S1 HOW TO MONITOR
PAGE 40
(3) Setting [I/F] The interface differs depending on the GOT to be used. Set the I/F according to the connection and the position of communication unit to be mounted onto the GOT.
PAGE 41
1 GT14 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING (c) [Front view]] DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 [Rear view] 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Standard interface 3 (GOT built-in USB interface) Standard interface 1 (GOT built-in RS-422 interface) Standard interface 2 (GOT built-in RS-232 interface) HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 Standard interface 4 (GOT built-in Ethernet interface) [Under view] 5 BUS CONNECTION (d) GT12 [Rear view] Standard interface 4 (GOT built-in Ethernet interface) 7 Sta
PAGE 42
(e) GT11 • GT11 Serial [Front view] Standard interface 3 (GOT built-in USB interface) [Rear view] Standard interface 1 (GOT built-in RS-422 interface) Standard interface 2 (GOT built-in RS-232 interface) • GT11 Bus [Front view] Standard interface 3 (GOT built-in USB interface) [Rear view] Standard interface 2 (GOT built-in RS-232 interface) Standard interface 1 (GOT built-in Bus interface) 1 - 10 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.
PAGE 43
1 GT105 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING (f) DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 [Rear view] 3 Standard interface 3 (GOT built-in USB interface) ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Standard interface 1 (GOT built-in RS-422 interface) Standard interface 2 (GOT built-in RS-232 interface) (g) GT104 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 Standard interface 1 (GOT built-in RS-422 interface) BUS CONNECTION 5 Standard interface 3 (GOT built-in USB interface) 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Standard interface 2 (GO
PAGE 44
1.1.2 I/F communication setting This function displays the list of the GOT communication interfaces. Set the channel and the communication driver to the interface to be used.  Setting 1. Select [Common] 2. The I/F Communication Setting dialog box appears. Make the settings with reference to the following explanation. [I/F Communication Setting] from the menu. POINT When using the parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator.
PAGE 45
1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING  Setting item The following describes the setting items for the standard I/F setting and extension I/F setting. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 I/F Driver Detail Setting RS232 Setting : Standard I/F-1, Standard I/F-2, Standard I/F-3 Set the CH No. according to the intended purpose. The number of channels differs depending on the GOT to be used. 0: Not used 1 to 4: Used for connecting a controller of channel No.
PAGE 46
Item Description Extension I/F setting Set the communication unit attached to the extension interface of the GOT. CH No. Set the CH No. according to the intended purpose. The number of channels differs depending on the GOT to be used. 0: Not used 1 to 4: Used for connecting a controller of channel No.
PAGE 47
Write the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option OS, project data and communication settings onto the GOT. For details on writing to GOT, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version 2 Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 1.2.1 Screen Design Manual PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1.
PAGE 48
1.2.2 Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT Confirm if the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option OS, project data and communication settings are properly written onto the GOT by reading from GOT using GT Designer3. For reading from the GOT, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version 1. 2. 3. Select [Communication] Screen Design Manual [Read from GOT…] from the menu. The [Communication configuration] dialog box appears.
PAGE 49
1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection The following shows the option devices to connect in the respective connection type. For the specifications, usage and connecting procedure on option devices, refer to the respective device manual.
PAGE 50
1.3.
PAGE 51
This section describes the precautions for installing units on another unit. For the installation method of each unit, refer to the User's Manual for the communication unit and option unit you are using. For the method for installing a unit on another unit, refer to the following. User's Manual of GOT used.
PAGE 52
(3) Calculation example (a) When connecting the GT15-J71BR13, GT15-RS4-9S (3 units), GT15-J71E71-100 (For the gateway function) and a bar code reader (0.12 A) to the GT1575-V Current supply capacity of GOT (A) Total consumed current (A) 2.2 0.77+0.33+0.33+0.33+0.224+0.12=2.104 Since the calculated value is within the capacity of the GOT, they can be connected to the GOT. (b) When connecting the GT15-J71BR13, GT15-RS4-9S (2 units), GT15-J71E71-100 (For the gateway function) and a bar code reader (0.
PAGE 53
POINT Cautions for using GT15-QBUS2 and GT15-ABUS2 Recognized as the 3rd stage of extend interface 1 Recognized as the 2nd stage of extend interface 2 Recognized as the 2nd stage of extend interface 1 Recognized as the 1st stage of extend interface 2 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET The stage number of communication units installed on the next stage of GT15-QBUS2 or GT15-ABUS2 are recognized by the GOT differently depending on the extension interface position.
PAGE 54
 When using a MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit, CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit, or CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13) Install a MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit, CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit, or CC-Link communication unit in the 1st stage of an extension interface. These communication units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage.
PAGE 55
Z) or CC-Link communication unit (GT15-75J61BT13-Z) Install a MELSECNET/10 communication unit (GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z) or CC-Link communication unit (GT15-75J61BT13-Z) at the 1st stage of the extension interface. These communication units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage. For GT16 and the GT155 , the MELSECNET/10 communication unit (GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15- 75J71BR13-Z) and the CC-Link communication unit (GT15-75J61BT13-Z) are not applicable.
PAGE 56
 When using the printer unit, sound output unit, or external I/O unit The printer unit, sound output unit, or external I/O unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the extension interface.
PAGE 57
POINT Precautions for video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, RGB output unit, and multimedia unit Recognized as the 2nd stage of extension interface 1 Recognized as the 2nd stage of extension interface 2 Recognized as the 1st stage of extension interface 2 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Recognized as the 3rd stage of extension interface 1 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET When a communication unit is installed on any of the units above, the stage number of the communication unit recogniz
PAGE 58
1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection To connect the GOT to a device in the respective connection type, connection cables between the GOT and a device are necessary. For cables needed for each connection, refer to each chapter for connection. 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications The following shows the connector specifications on the GOT side. Refer to the following table when preparing connection cables by the user.
PAGE 59
Use the following as the RS-422 interface and the RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the connection cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (1) Connector model Connector model Manufacturer 2 RS-422 conversion unit 9-pin D-sub (female) M2.6 millimeter screw fixed type 17LE-13090-27(D2AC) DDK Ltd. GT16*1 14-pin (female) HDR-EC14LFDT1-SLE+ Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd. 9-pin D-sub (female) M2.
PAGE 60
 RS-485 interface Use the following as the RS-485 interface and the RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the connection cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (1) Connector model Hardware version*1 GOT GT16*2 ― GT14 ― GT12 ― GT1155-QTBD C or later GT1155-QSBD F or later GT1150-QLBD GT105 -Q GT104 -Q Manufacturer 14-pin (female) HDR-EC14LFDT1-SLE+ Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd. 9-pin D-sub (female) M2.
PAGE 61
The following describes the method for connecting the BNC connector (connector plug for coaxial cable) and the cable. CAUTION  Solder the coaxial cable connectors properly. 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Insufficient soldering may result in malfunctions. Structure of the coaxial cable Washer External conductor Outer sheath Insulating material Gasket 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Components of the BNC connector Nut Plug shell Clamp Internal conductor Contact 1.
PAGE 62
1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT The following shows the terminating resistor specifications on the GOT side. When setting the terminating resistor in each connection type, refer to the following.  RS-422/485 communication unit  GT16 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch. Switch No. Terminating OFF 2 Enable ON ON OFF OFF Disable The default setting is "Disable".
PAGE 63
1  GT105 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING  GT12 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 Terminating resistor selector switch  GT11 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch.
PAGE 64
 GT1030 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch. Terminating resistor selector switch  GT1020 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch. Terminating resistor selector switch 1 - 32 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.
PAGE 65
1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch according to the connection type. POINT Enable the 5V power supply Make sure to validate "Enable the 5V power supply" in the [RS232 Setting] to operate the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor. 1.1.2 I/F communication setting When validating the function using the utility function of the GOT main unit, refer to the following manual. GT14 User's Manual 8.
PAGE 66
1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment Verify the GOT recognizes controllers on [Communication Settings] of the Utility. • Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status • Communication unit installation status For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GT User's Manual  When using GT16, GT12 (For GT16) 1. 1. 2. 2. 1 - 34 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.
PAGE 67
4. 5. The [Communication Settings] appears. Verify that the communication driver name to be used is displayed in the communication interface box to be used. When the communication driver name is not displayed normally, carry out the following procedure again. 1.1Setting the Communication Interface 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 BUS CONNECTION 5 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 4. 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 3.
PAGE 68
 For GT15, GT14 or GT11 1. 1. 2. After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu] [Communication setting] from the Utility. Touch [Communication setting]. (The screen on the left is not displayed on GT11.) 2. 3. 4. 3. 4. 5. 1 - 36 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment The [Communication Setting] appears. Verify that the communication driver name to be used is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used.
PAGE 69
1. 1. After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu] [Comm. Setting] from the Utility. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1  For GT10 2. 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 Touch [Standard I/F] on [Comm. Setting]. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 4. 5. The [Standard I/F] appears. Verify that the communication driver name to be used is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used.
PAGE 70
POINT Utility (1) How to display Utility (at default) When using GT16, GT1595, GT14, GT12 or GT1020 Utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner When using GT1585, GT157 , GT156 , GT155 , GT11, GT105 , GT104 or GT1030 Utility display (When using GT16, GT12) (When using GT15) (When using GT105 (When using GT14, GT11) GT104 ) , Utility call key Simultaneous 2-point press (When using GT1030,GT1020) (2) Utility call When setting [Pressing time] to other than 0 second on the setting sc
PAGE 71
1 1.6.1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring Check on the GOT  Check for errors occurring on the GOT Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual.
PAGE 72
 Perform an I/O check Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the I/O check screen by Main Menu. • For GT16, GT12 Display the I/O check screen by [Main menu] • For GT15, GT14, GT11 Display the I/O check screen by [Main menu] [Self check] [I/O check]. [Debug & self check] [Self check] [I/O check].
PAGE 73
GT10 User's Manual (Operation of communication monitoring function screen) Main Menu 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET The communication monitoring is a function that checks whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the communication monitoring function screen by [Main Menu] [Comm. Setting] [Comm. Monitor].
PAGE 74
 Confirming the communication status with network unit by GOT (1) For MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network system The communication status between the GOT and the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network system can be confirmed by the Utility screen of the GOT. For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual.
PAGE 75
The communication status between the GOT and CC-Link IE Controller Network can be confirmed by the utility screen of the GOT. For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual.
PAGE 76
(4) For CC-Link system The communication status between the GOT and the CC-Link System can be confirmed by the Utility screen of the GOT. For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual. GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) GT15 User's Manual POINT CC-Link communication unit when network module status display is made When displaying the network module status, use the CC-Link communication unit of MODEL GT15-J61BT13.
PAGE 77
1 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET GT Designer3 (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows® Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows®. (a) When normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.18 Reply from 192.168.0.18: bytes=32time<1ms TTL=64 3 (b) When abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.18 Request timed out. (2) When using the [PING Test] of GT Designer3 Select [Communication] [PING Test]. [Communication configuration] 1. 2.
PAGE 78
 Confirming the communication state on the GOT (For GT16, GT14) [PING Test] can be confirmed by the Utility screen of the GOT. For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual. GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) GT14 User's Manual 1 - 46 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.
PAGE 79
1 Confirming the communication state to each station (Station monitoring function) PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6.3 (1) No. of faulty stations (a) Ethernet connection (Except for Ethernet multiple connection) Total No. of the faulty CPU is stored. b15 to b8 b7 to b0 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Device GS230 (b) Ethernet multiple connection Total No. of the faulty connected equipment is stored. Device b15 to b8 b7 to b0 Ch1 GS280 (00H fixed) No.
PAGE 80
(2) Faulty station information (GS231 to GS238) The bit corresponding to the faulty station is set.(0: Normal, 1: Abnormal) The bit is reset after the fault is recovered. (a) Ethernet connection (Except for Ethernet multiple connection) GS231 bit 0 GS231 bit 1 GS231 bit 2 GS231 bit 3 PLC No.
PAGE 81
1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING (3) Network No., station No. notification The network No. and station No. of the GOT in Ethernet connection are stored at GOT startup. If connected by other than Ethernet, 0 is stored. Device Description CH2 CH3 CH4 GS376 GS378 GS380 GS382 Network No. (1 to 239) GS377 GS379 GS381 GS383 Station No.
PAGE 82
1.6.4 Check on GX Developer  Check if the PLC CPU recognizes the GOT (For bus connection) (QCPU (Q mode) only) Using the [System monitor] of GX Developer, check if the PLC CPU recognizes the GOT or not. For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual. GX Developer Version Operating Manual (1) Check the Module Name, I/O Address and Implementation Position.
PAGE 83
1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING  Checking the wiring state (For optical loop system only) Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) (2) Check the [Receive direction error station] (The display example on GX Developer Version 8) Startup procedure 3 Loop test ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING [MELSECNET (II)/10/H diagnostics] HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 BUS CONNECTION 5 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION [Diagnostics] 8 ETHERNE
PAGE 84
 Checking if the GOT is performed the data link correctly (1) For MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network system Check if the GOT is performed the data link correctly in [Other station information]. For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual.
PAGE 85
Use [CC IE Control diagnostics…] of GX Developer to check if the GOT is correctly performed the data link. For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual.
PAGE 86
1.6.5 Check on GX Works2  For CC-Link IE Field Network system Use [CC IE Field diagnostics] of GX Works2 to check if the GOT is correctly performed the data link. For the GX Works2 operation method, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual Startup procedure GX Works2 → [diagnostics] → [CC IE Field diagnostics] 1 - 54 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.
PAGE 87
1 Check on the PLC  Checking the wiring state of the optical fiber cable (For CC-Link IE Controller Network only) PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6.6 Check if the fiber-optic cable is connected correctly to all the modules in the CC-Link IE Controller Network. Perform the line test from the control station of the CC-Link IE Controller Network to check the wiring state of the fiber-optic cable. For the line testing method, refer to the following manual.
PAGE 88
1 - 56 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.
PAGE 89
MITSUBISHI PLC CONNECTIONS 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 1 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 1 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 1 5. BUS CONNECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 1 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 1 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION. . . . .
PAGE 90
PAGE 91
2 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.3 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 10 2.4 MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 11 2.5 MELSEC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 12 2.6 MELSEC-FX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 13 2.7 MELSEC-WS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 92
2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET The device ranges that can be set for the Mitsubishi PLCs are as follows. Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3. The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models, even though belonging to the same series. Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used.
PAGE 93
1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING  Setting item DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 When selecting buffer memory (G) with the following controllers MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 MELSEC-L MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 * MELSEC-Q(MULTI)/Q MOTION 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING (For MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700) HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 (For MELSEC-FX) Item Description Set the device name, device number, and bit number.
PAGE 94
(For device BM and CPU No. 0) (1) Setting of the CPU No. (a) When monitoring a single CPU system Set to 0. (b) When monitoring a multiple CPU system Set the CPU No. (0 to 4) in [CPU No.] when monitoring a multiple CPU system. When [CPU No.] is set to "0", the monitoring target differs depending on the connection method. Connection method (For device BM and CPU No.
PAGE 95
(b) Mask type 1 • (For 16 bits) Monitor and write only b0 to b3 of the buffer memory. Example: The monitor value is 0001H when monitoring BM=4321H as mask type 1. BM0 4 3 2 1 H Monitor value 0 0 0 1 H 3 2 1 H Monitor value 0 0 0 2 H Input value 4 3 2 1 H BM0 0 0 0 0 H 0 0 1 0 H (Before writing) BM0 (After writing) BM0 (After writing) 3 2 1 H 0 0 0 0 H 0 0 0 1 H • (For 32 bits) Monitor and write only b4 to b7 and b20 to 23 of the buffer memory.
PAGE 96
• (For 32 bits) Monitor and write only b8 to b11 and b28 to 31 of the buffer memory. Example: The monitor value is 00070003H when monitoring BM0=87654321H as mask type 3. BM0 Monitor value 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 4 7 0 3 0 2 0 1 H BM0 (Before writing) 8 7 0 0 6 5 0 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 BM0 4 3 2 1 H Monitor value 0 0 2 1 H 3 H BM0=05000100H when writing input value 87654321H to BM0=00000000H as mask type 3.
PAGE 97
1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H Monitor value 0 0 8 7 0 0 4 3 H 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET BM0 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING • (For 32 bits) Monitor and write only b8 to b15 and b24 to 31 of the buffer memory. Example: The monitor value is 00870043H when monitoring BM0=87654321H as mask type 6. BM0=65002100H when writing input value 87654321H to BM0=00000000H as mask type 6.
PAGE 98
2.1 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 The table below shows the device ranges in [MELSECQnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700]*10 as the controller type. Device name Setting range Input (X) X0 to X3FFF Output (Y) Y0 to Y3FFF Internal relay (M)*4*6*11 M0 to M61439 Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767 Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767 (B)*4 Link relay Timer*6 Counter*6 Device No.
PAGE 99
X3FFF to Y3FFF Internal relay (M)*4*6 M0 to M61439 Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767 Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767 Link relay (B)*4 B0 to BEFFF TT0 to TT32767 Counter*6 Contact (TT) Coil (TC) TC0 to TC32767 Contact (CT) CT0 to CT32767 Coil (CC) Special relay (SM) to CC32767 to SM2047 Retentive Contact (SS) SS0 to SS32767 timer*6 Coil (SC) SC0 to SC32767 Step relay (S) S0 to S8191 Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FFF Specified bit of the following word device
PAGE 100
2.3 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 * The device ranges that can be set when selecting [MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*]*13 as the controller type are as follows.
PAGE 101
1 X1FFF Output (Y) Y0 to Y1FFF Internal relay (M)*12 M0 to M32767 Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767 Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767 Link relay (B) to B7FFF TT0 to TT32767 Coil (TC) TC0 to TC32767 Contact (CT) CT0 to CT32767 Coil (CC) CC0 to CC32767 SM0 to SM2047 Special relay (SM)*9 Retentive Contact (SS) SS0 to SS32767 timer*12 Coil (SC) SC0 to SC32767 Step relay (S) S0 to S32767 Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FF Word device bit Specified bit of the foll
PAGE 102
2.5 MELSEC-A The device ranges that can be set when selecting [MELSEC-A] as the controller type are as follows.
PAGE 103
Y377 Auxiliary relay (M) M0 to M7679 Special auxiliary relay (M) M8000 to M8511 State (S) S0 to S4095 Timer contact (T) T0 to T511 Counter contact (C) C0 to C255 Word device bit*1 Specified bit of the following word devices (Except Timer (set value) and Counter (set value)) Data register (D) D0 to D0999 File register (D) D1000 to D7999 Special data register (D) D8000 to D8511 Timer (current value) (T) T0 to T511 Counter (current value) (C) C0 to C255 Timer (set value)
PAGE 104
2.7 MELSEC-WS The device ranges that can be set when selecting (3) Engineering software for MELSEC-WS and device representation of GT Designer3 The engineering software for MELSEC-WS and the device representation of GT Designer3 are different. Set the device by referring to the following table. [MELSEC-WS] as the controller type are as follows. Bit device Device Setting range Input (I) I1.1 to I12.8 Output (Q) Q1.1 to Q12.8 Logic result (LQ) LQ0.0 to LQ3.7 Logic input (LI) LI0.0 LI3.
PAGE 105
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +0 I1.1 I1.2 I1.3 I1.4 I1.5 I1.6 I1.7 I1.8 +8 to +15 +16 I2.1 I2.2 I2.3 I2.4 I2.5 I2.6 I2.7 I2.8 +32 I3.1 I3.2 I3.3 I3.4 I3.5 I3.6 I3.7 I3.8 +48 I4.1 I4.2 I4.3 I4.4 I4.5 I4.6 I4.7 I4.8 +64 I5.1 I5.2 I5.3 I5.4 I5.5 I5.6 I5.7 I5.8 +80 I6.1 I6.2 I6.3 I6.4 I6.5 I6.6 I6.7 I6.8 +96 I7.1 I7.2 I7.3 I7.4 I7.5 I7.6 I7.7 I7.8 I8.8 +112 I8.1 I8.2 I8.3 I8.4 I8.5 I8.6 I8.7 +128 I9.1 I9.2 I9.3 I9.4 I9.5 I9.6 I9.
PAGE 106
2 - 16 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.
PAGE 107
3 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 2 3.2 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 13 3.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring . . . .
PAGE 108
3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 3.1.1 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE Controller Network, CC-Link IE Field Network  Bus connection (1) When connecting to multiple CPU system • The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations on the network. Control station GOT *1 Normal station Normal station Normal station • The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations on other networks.
PAGE 109
*1 Control station *1 Normal station Normal station Normal station Control station Normal station Normal station Normal station • When connected to a relay station and the data link system is included, the master station and local stations can be monitored. • When connected to a relay station, it is not necessary to designate the data link parameter [Effective unit number for accessing other stations] for the PLC CPU of the connected station.
PAGE 110
 Direct CPU connection/computer link connection (1) When connecting to multiple CPU system • Corresponding to the access range described in ■ Bus connection (1). (2) When connecting to QCPU (Q mode)/QnACPU • Corresponding to the access range described in ■ Bus connection (2). (3) When connecting to QCPU (A mode)/AnUCPU • The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations on the network.
PAGE 111
1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING  MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection, CC-Link IE Controller Network When transmitting cyclic transmission with a GOT, even if link device X and/or Y are assigned to a GOT when setting the network parameter for the control station, the GOT cannot access the host station. When transmitting cyclic transmission, use link device B and/or W. • The GOT is regarded as a normal station and monitors the control station and all normal stations on the network.
PAGE 112
POINT Precautions when using the QCPU redundant system When monitoring other networks, do not set the QCPU redundant system as a relay station. If the QCPU redundant system is set as a relay station, the GOT cannot switch the monitoring target automatically when the system is switched. (A timeout error occurs due to failed monitoring)  Monitoring devices of other stations on the network If devices of other stations on the network system are monitored, the display speed will be significantly reduced.
PAGE 113
1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING  Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices Example 1: When using bus connection Control station Control station AnU (1-1) QnA (2-1) Network No.2 AnN (2-3) (1) To monitor B or W of the connected station (host station) assigned with a network parameter, specify the host station. (2) To monitor another station (other than B or W) or another network, specify the station (network No. and station No.).
PAGE 114
Example 2: When using bus connection Control station Control station QnA (1-1) AnU (2-1) Network No.1 AnA (1-2) AnU (2-4) Network No.2 QnA (1-3) (2-2) (M) AnU (2-3) Data link system QnA (L1) AnA (L2) • Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the following table. (1) To monitor B or W of the connected station (host station) assigned with a network parameter, specify the host station.
PAGE 115
1 Control station DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET AnN (2-3) • Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the following table. (1) To monitor B or W of the connected station (host station) assigned with a network parameter, specify the host station. (2) To monitor another station (other than B or W) or another network, specify the station (network No. and station No.).
PAGE 116
Example 4: When using CPU direct connection or computer link connection Control station Control station AnU (2-1) Q(Q mode) (1-1) Network No.1 AnA (1-2) AnU (2-4) Network No.2 QnA (1-3) (2-2) (M) AnU (2-3) Data link system QnA (L1) AnA (L2) • Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the following table.
PAGE 117
1 QnA (2-2) 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Network No. 2 AnN (2-3) GOT (1-3) • Monitor access range for other station devices (other than B and W) Station to be accessed Network No.1 QnA (1-1) Station connected to GOT Q (Q mode) (1-2) GOT (1-3) 3 Network No.2 GOT (1-3) AnU (1-4) Q (Q mode) (2-1) QnA (2-2) AnN (2-3) AnU (2-4) ―― : Accessible : Not accessible • Designating network No.
PAGE 118
Example 6: When using CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) /CC-Link connection (via G4) Image of CC-Link Connection GOT Network module CC-Link Master module (0 station) (1-2) Q(Q mode) (1-2) CC-Link System GOT AnA (1-3) QnA (1-1) AnN (1-4) GOT Station to be accessed Station connected to GOT Network System GOT QnA (1-1) Q (Q mode) (1-2) AnA (1-3) AnN (1-4) QnA (1-1) Q(Q mode) (1-2) AnA (1-3) AnN (1-4) : Accessible 3 - 12 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.
PAGE 119
 Access range 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 3.2 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Connection 8.
PAGE 120
3.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring  When using Bus connection/CPU direct connection/computer link connection Only connected stations can be monitored.  When using CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) (1) Access range The master station and local station can be monitored. : Can be monitored, Monitor target Monitoring by cyclic transmission : Cannot be monitored Monitoring by transient transmission Master station (Remote network Ver.2 mode) Local station Station No.1 (Ver.
PAGE 121
2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET (3) Setting NW No. and station number 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET (a) When monitoring devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated to the master station by CC-Link parameter setting NW No.: 0, PLC station number: Local PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 (b) Monitoring PLC CPU devices of other stations Set the device name and device No. (b) When monitoring PLC CPU devices of another station NW No.
PAGE 122
 Monitoring overview The following two methods are available for monitoring by the GOT with CC-Link communication unit. Monitoring method Monitoring by transient transmission*2 Contents Devices of the PLC CPU on the CC-Link system master and local station are specified and monitored. Advantage The CC-Link parameter setting sequence program is required.
PAGE 123
1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 3.4 Data Link System (MELSECNET/B, (II)) Access Range for Monitoring (1) When connecting to the master station M GOT L3 L2 • The master station can be monitored. However, when the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU, devices other than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored. • Other local stations cannot be monitored.
PAGE 124
 Setting method of monitor device The following example describes the method of setting the network No. and the station numbers when setting monitor devices . M L3 L1 L2 m 3 1 GOT 2 (1) Monitoring the connected station (host station) and B and W allocated by the link parameter Specify the host station. (2) Monitoring devices of other stations Network No.: 0, Station number: Refer to the following table. Setting of the station No.
PAGE 125
POINT (1) Connection to remote I/O station of MELSECNET/B, (II) or /10 The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/B, (II) data link system and MELSECNET/10 network system. Connect the GOT to the remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/H network system. Network No.1 Station No.
PAGE 126
 Direct CPU connection (1) The network units (QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QP72BR15) of the remote I/O station are handled as PLC CPU. Connect the GOT to the RS-232 interface of the network unit. For cables required for connection with the network module and other details, refer to the following. 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU (2) Specify a type including MELSEC-Q (including multiple), or MELSEC-QnU for the controller type on GT Designer3. Then, specify [[NW No.] (Network No.
PAGE 127
(2) Specify a type including MELSEC-Q (including multiple), or MELSEC-QnU for the controller type on GT Designer3. Then, specify [[NW No.] (Network No. of the remote I/O network) to 1, and specify [Station No.] (Master station) to 0.] as the monitoring target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box. (GT16, GT15 only) The GOT monitors stations on the MELSECNET/H network with the transient transmission.
PAGE 128
3.7 Connection to the Head Module of CC-Link IE Field Network System When connected to the head module of the CC-Link IE Field Network, the GOT can monitor the PLC CPUs of the master station and local stations. When connecting the GOT to the head module, use the following connection methods.  Computer link connection Monitor target Network No. 1, Station No.
PAGE 129
1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING POINT Connection between GT11, GT10 and head module of CC-Link IE Field Network GT11, GT10 can not access the master station on CC-Link IE Field Network. GT11, GT10 can access only the connected host station (head module). 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET  Restrictions on connection to head module The GOT does not allow the clock of the master station to be set in the clock setting of the utility function.
PAGE 130
3 - 24 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.
PAGE 131
4 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 4.1 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 8 4.2 Direct CPU Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.3 CC-Link Connection (Intelligent Device Station) . . . . . . . . .4 - 18 4.
PAGE 132
4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM This section explains the restrictions on the connection methods and other information applicable when the QCPU redundant system is monitored by the GOT. Monitor target Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station) Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Empty QJ61BT11N Tracking cable QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Control system (System A) Station No.
PAGE 133
(1) Direct CPU connection (Remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H network system) 4.1.1 Direct CPU connection (Direct CPU connection to the remote I/O station) (2) Computer link connection (Serial communication module mounted on remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H network system) 4.1.2 Computer link connection (Connection to serial communication module mounted on remote I/O station) (3) Ethernet connection (Ethernet module mounted on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system) 4.1.
PAGE 134
The following table shows the features of each connection method.
PAGE 135
1 CC-Link Master station • MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/ 10 connection (Network system) GOT2 Standby master station Standby system Control system GOT Control system CC-Link Master station Station No.2 (normal station) Standby system GOT2 Standby master station Control system Standby system The monitoring target is automatically changed to the control system PLC CPU. Station No.3 (normal station) MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network (MELSECNET/H mode or MELSECNET/10 mode) Station No.
PAGE 136
Connection type Before system switching • Computer link connection (Serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) • Ethernet connection (Ethernet module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) • CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) (CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) • CC-Link connection (Via G4) (CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) *1 *2 Control system Standby system Control system Statio
PAGE 137
Precautions for monitoring the QCPU redundant system (1) A system alarm may be detected when the system is switched in a redundant system. When Q redundant setting is made : "450 Path has changed or timeout occurred in redundant system." When Q redundant setting is not made : "402 Communication timeout. Confirm communication pathway or modules." However, even if the error occurs, the GOT automatically resumes monitoring and there are no problems in the monitoring operation.
PAGE 138
4.1 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/ H Network System 4.1.1 Direct CPU connection (Direct CPU connection to the remote I/O station) This section explains the direct CPU connection that connects the GOT to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system. Network No. 1, Station No.
PAGE 139
Network No. 1, Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station) Standby system (System B) 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 MELSECNET/H remote I/O network Empty Empty QJ71C24N QJ72LP25-25 Power supply module Network No. 1, Station No.
PAGE 140
4.1.3 Ethernet connection (Connection to Ethernet module mounted on remote I/O station) This section explains the Ethernet connection for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the remote I/ O station of the MELSECNET/H network system. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the I/O station of the MELESCNET/H network system. Network No. 1, Station No.
PAGE 141
This section describes the direct CPU connection by which a GOT is connected to a PLC CPU in the redundant system. Two methods for the CPU direct connection, using one or two GOTs, are available. CPU direct connection GOT Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Control system (System A) 3 Network No. 1, Station No.
PAGE 142
4.2.2 When using two GOTs Connect a GOT to each PLC CPU to respond to the system switching. CPU direct connection CPU direct connection GOT2 GOT1 Monitor target Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station) Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Control system (System A) Network No. 1, Station No.
PAGE 143
(2) In CPU direct connection, when monitoring a PLC CPU in the redundant system, only the PLC CPU that is directly connected to the GOT can be monitored. (3) When connected to the standby system PLC CPU, the writing of the GOT to a device in the connected PLC CPU is not reflected. Design a monitor screen that disables writing to the standby system. In the redundant system, the tracking function transfers device data from control system to standby system.
PAGE 144
The following diagram shows an example of screen setting using SM1515. System configuration example: when using one GOT GOT Control system (System A) Standby Q25PRH Q25PRH QJ71 Station system CPU CPU BR11 No. 0 (System B) QJ72 BR15 QJ71 Station BR11 No. 1 Station No. 2 Create a monitor screen on the base screen 1 that performs the following operations for when connecting a GOT to control system and standby system.
PAGE 145
Set the screen switching device of the base screen. Choose [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [Screen Switching/Window], and set the internal device GD100 as the base screen switching device. (Do not use PLC CPU devices for the screen switching device. If used, the Status Observation operation of the GOT may be disabled since the device data of the PLC CPU is overwritten by the device value transferred with the redundant system tracking function) 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.
PAGE 146
3. Set the comment display on the base screen 1. Set a comment to be displayed on the base screen 1 depending on the system status (ON/OFF of the SM1515) of the connected PLC CPU using the Comment Display (Bit). Select [Object] [Comment Display] [Bit Comment] and set Comment Display (Bit). Device/Style tab Device : SM1515 Shape : None Comment tab : Comment Display Type Text (ON) : Basic Comment The operation status is control system. Touch the screen to display the next screen.
PAGE 147
Set the touch switches on the base screen 1. By using the go to screen switch function, set a touch switch for shifting the screen to the next screen with a screen touch, when the connected PLC CPU is the control system (SM1515 is ON). Select [Object] [Switch] [Go To Screen Switch] and set the screen switching function. Set the same size for the touch switch as the base screen size so that touching any place of the screen enables the switch operation.
PAGE 148
4.3 CC-Link Connection (Intelligent Device Station) This section describes the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) that connects the GOT set as the intelligent device station to the CC-Link network. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT set as the intelligent device station to the CC-Link network. CC-Link connection Network No. 0, Station No. 0 (Master station) Network No. 0, Station No.
PAGE 149
QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System) (Sample Programs when Using CC-Link) DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET (b) System switching due to a network communication error occurred in other than the CC-Link of the control system, or due to switching by the user When system switching occurs, the CC-Link does not switch the station No. 0 of the master station and the station No. 1 of the standby master station on the network.
PAGE 150
4.4 CC-Link Connection (Via G4) This section explains the CC-Link connection (via G4) that connects the GOT to the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link network. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link network. Network No. 0, Station No. 2 (AJ65BT-G4-S3) Network No. 0, Station No. 0 (Master station) Network No. 0, Station No.
PAGE 151
QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System) (Sample Programs when Using CC-Link) DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET (b) System switching due to a network communication error occurred in other than the CC-Link of the control system, or due to switching by the user When system switching occurs, the CC-Link does not switch the station No. 0 of the master station and the station No. 1 of the standby master station on the network.
PAGE 152
4.5 MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 Connections (Network Systems) This section explains the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 connections (network systems) that connect the GOT to the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 network system. The following provides an example of connecting the GOT set as a normal station to the MELSECNET/ H network system. Network No. 1, Station No. 3 (Normal station) GOT Network No. 1, Station No.
PAGE 153
This section explains the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection (network system) that connects the GOT to the CCLink IE controller network. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT set as a normal station to the CC-Link IE Controller Network. Network No. 1, Station No. 3 (Normal station) GOT Network No. 1, Station No.
PAGE 154
4.7 Ethernet Connection This section explains the Ethernet connection that connects the GOT to the Ethernet network system. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the Ethernet network. Network No. 1, Station No. 3 GOT Network No. 1, Station No. 2 Network No. 1, Station No.
PAGE 155
This section explains the computer link connection for connecting the GOT to the serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit.
PAGE 156
4.8.2 Ethernet connection (Connection to the Ethernet module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) This section explains the Ethernet connection for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit.
PAGE 157
Monitor target Empty Empty QJ71BR11 Standby system (System B) Empty Empty Empty QJ61BT11N Power supply module ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 CC-Link connection Redundant type extension base unit Network No. 0, Station No. 1 GOT Network No. 0, Station No. 0 (Master station) (1) Connection method Connect the GOT to the CC-Link module (QJ61BT11N) mounted on the redundant type extension base unit. For details, refer to the following. 13.
PAGE 158
4.8.4 CC-Link connection (Via G4) (Connection to the CC-Link module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) This section explains the CC-Link connection (Via G4) for connecting the GOT to the CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit via the AJ65BT-G4-S3. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link network.
PAGE 159
The following explains the setting for automatically change the monitoring target of the GOT when monitoring a QCPU redundant system. Before making the Q redundant setting In the Q redundant setting, do not set stations other than redundant CPUs. 1. Select [Common] 2. The setting dialog box appears. Make the settings with reference to the following explanation. [Q Redundant] from the menu. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 Make the settings for the Q redundant setting.
PAGE 160
*1 Pair number Redundant CPU pair means the redundant CPUs (System A / System B) in the redundant system configuration. Pair number is the number assigned to each redundant CPU pair. Example: Ethernet connection (Pair No. 1 and Pair No. 2) Redundant CPU pair (No.1) Station No.1 QJ71E71-100 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module QJ71E71-100 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module GOT Station No.2 Station No.5 Ethernet (Network No.1) Redundant CPU pair (No.2) Station No.
PAGE 161
1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function Advantage Station number switching function The monitor screens for Station No. 1 (control system) and Station No. 2 (standby system) can be created on one screen. Disadvantage Some objects do not allow the station number to be switched. Screen switching function All objects can be used since monitor screens are created for each station number.
PAGE 162
1. Set the station number switching device. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] [Station No. Switching], and set the internal device GD100 as the station number switching device. Do not use a device of PLC CPU as a screen switching device. Since the device information is transferred by the tracking transfer function of the redundant system, the status observation may be disabled. Set here. 2. Set the status observation.
PAGE 163
Validate the station number switching function. On the Basic tab screen specified by selecting [Screen] validate the station number changing function. Make this setting for each monitor screen. [Screen Property], select the item [Switch Station No.] to 1 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 4. Create a monitor screen. For MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection or Ethernet connection: (Common) In the device setting (network setting) of each object, set Network No. 1 and Station No.
PAGE 164
HINT When the MELSECNET/H network is connected to the redundant system only, SW56 (current control station) can be set as the station number switching device. In this case, even if the system switching occurs, the GOT always monitors the station number that is currently the control station.  Setting method (Ethernet connection) System configuration example 2: Ethernet connection Station No. 3 GOT Ethernet Network No. 1 Control system Q25PRH (System A) CPU QJ71 E71 Q25PRH CPU Station No.
PAGE 165
Condition 1 : GS231.b0 (while ON) When b0 is ON, Station No. 1 is abnormal. Operation Station No. is changed to 2. : GD100=258(0102H) Condition 1 : GS231.b1 (while ON) When b1 is ON, Station No. 2 is abnormal. Operation Station No. is changed to 1. : GD100=257(0101H) 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Set the status observation.
PAGE 166
4. On the screen 1, set the switch for writing the station No. 1 to the station number switching device. After the GOT is started up, the station number switching device value of the GOT is "0". For Ethernet connection, the monitor becomes abnormal when the station number switching device value is "0". Therefore, set the switch for writing the station number to the station number switching device and the switch for shifting to the monitor screen on the screen 1.
PAGE 167
• Screen script for Ethernet connection: 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET // If the host station is not a control station, the station number is switched to that of the other station. if([b:SM1515]==OFF){ if([w:GD100]==0x0101){ // Station No. 1 to 2 [w:GD100]=0x0102; }else{ 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Change the station number switching device value in the script.
PAGE 168
4.10.2 Method for using the screen changing function • As a feature of this function, monitor screens are created for each station number. When the system switching occurs, the GOT can change the monitoring target to the control system PLC CPU on the other monitor screen.
PAGE 169
When b0 is ON, Station No. 1 is abnormal. Operation Screen No. is changed to 2. : GD100=2 Condition 1 : SW70.b1 (while ON) When b1 is ON, Station No. 2 is abnormal. Operation Screen No. is changed to 1. : GD100=1 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Condition 1 : SW70.b0 (while ON) 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Set the status observation.
PAGE 170
3. 4. Set monitor screens. For MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection or Ethernet connection: (Common) • Create a monitor screen with each object whose network setting is Station No. 1 on Screen No. 1 (1-1). • Create a monitor screen with each object whose network setting is Station No. 2 on Screen No. 2 (1-2). Change the screen switching device value in the script.
PAGE 171
1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING  Setting method (Ethernet connection) System configuration example 2: Ethernet connection Ethernet Network No. 1 Station No. 3 GOT QJ71 E71 Q25PRH QJ71 E71 CPU Station No. 1 Connected module Standby system (System B) Network No. Station No. Ethernet module of control system Ethernet module of standby system 1 1 GOT connected to the Ethernet network Set the screen switching device of the base screen.
PAGE 172
4. Change the screen switching device value in the script. By selecting [Common] [Script] [Script], create a script for each monitor screen that checks the SM1515 status of the current monitor station, and if it is OFF (standby system), changes the station number switching device value. Set the trigger type of the script as [Ordinary] or [Sampling(about 3s)]. Screen script for Ethernet connection: The same script can be used for MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection and Ethernet connection.
PAGE 173
5 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 5. 1 BUS CONNECTION ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 5.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 5.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5 5.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 30 5.4 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 174
5. BUS CONNECTION 5.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to Q00JCPU*1 Q00CPU*2 Q01CPU*2 Q02CPU*2 Q02HCPU*2 Bus connection Q06HCPU*2 Q12HCPU*2 *3 5.2.
PAGE 175
Model name Clock Refer to - - L02CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P L26CPU-PBT Q02HCPU-A - - Q06HCPU-A Q2ACPU MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Bus connection *1 5.2.2 Q4ARCPU*2 3 Q2ASCPU MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU) Q2ASCPU-S1 Q2ASHCPU Bus connection *1 5.2.3 Q2ASHCPU-S1 A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU 4 A2ACPU HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU MELSEC-A (AnCPU) A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 A1NCPU Bus connection *1 5.2.
PAGE 176
Series Model name Clock A0J2HCPUR21 Communication type Bus connection A0J2HCPU-DC24 Refer to *1 5.2.4 A2CCPU A2CCPUP21 MELSEC-A A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 - - A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU Q172CPU*3*4 Q173CPU*3*4 Q172CPUN*3 Q173CPUN*3 Q172HCPU Motion controller CPU (Q Series) Q173HCPU Bus connection Q172DCPU *2 5.2.1 Q173DCPU Q172DCPU-S1 Q173DCPU-S1 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU Q170MCPU*5 MR-MQ100 - - A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 Bus connection *1 5.2.5 Bus connection *1 5.2.
PAGE 177
1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 5.2 System Configuration When "CONTROL BUS ERR" or "UNIT VERIFY ERR" occurs It can be considered that noise due to a long bus connection cable causes a malfunction. Check whether a signal line such as bus cable is placed near the equipment to operate. If the line is close to the equipment, make a distance of 100mm or more from the equipment.
PAGE 178
 When 2 to 5 GOTs are connected Bus extension connector box Main base unit Extension base unit 1st GOT Connection cable 1) Extension cable Connection cable 2) Main base Bus extension Extension cable Connection cable 3) GOT (1st)*5 PLC Main base GOT (Terminating station) Intermediary GOT Extension base connector box*2 *1 Extension base - - - Connection cable 1) Bus extension connector box*2 - Option device *6*7 Model GT15-75QBUS2L GT15-QBUS2 GT15-QC06B(0.6m) GT15-QC12B(1.
PAGE 179
Communication driver 2 GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2 GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS2 - (Built into GOT) GT15-QC06B(0.6m) GT15-QC12B(1.2m) GT15-QC30B(3m) GT15-QC50B(5m) GT15-QC100B(10m) GT15-QC150BS(15m) GT15-QC200BS(20m) GT15-QC250BS(25m) GT15-QC300BS(30m) GT15-QC350BS(35m) GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS2 GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS2 GT15-QC06B(0.6m) GT15-QC12B(1.
PAGE 180
5-8 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.
PAGE 181
1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Connecting to QnACPU or AnCPU  When one GOT is connected GOT Bus(A/QnA) Connection cable 2) Main base Extension cable *1 - Extens ion base - GOT Connection cable 1) Bus connector conversion Connection cable 2) Option device 3 Max. distance Model box*2 - - GT15-C12NB(1.2m) GT15-C30NB(3m) GT15-C50NB(5m) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 Between main base and GOT: 6.6m - (Built into GOT) Main base - - GT15-AC06B(0.
PAGE 182
 When 2 to 3 GOTs are connected Extension base unit Main base unit Bus extension connector box Connection cable 1) Extension cable 1st GOT 2nd GOT Connection cable 3) Connection cable 2) PLC*5 Main base Extension *1 cable - Connection cable 1) - - Extension base - - Connection cable 4) GOT (1st)*3 Extension base Extension cable 3rd GOT Bus connector conversion box Connection cable 2) *2 *6*7 GT15-C12NB(1.
PAGE 183
Communication driver GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 *4 Option device *6*7 GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 *4 GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 *4 3 Between main base and GOT(1st): 6.6m (Including the extension cable length) - - Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m Between main base and GOT (2nd): 36.
PAGE 184
5.2.3 Connection to QnASCPU or AnSCPU  When one GOT is connected Extension base unit Main base unit Bus extension connector box GOT Communication driver Bus(A/QnA) Connection cable 1) Extension cable Connection cable 2) PLC Extens ion base Extension cable *1 Main base GOT Connection cable 1) Bus connector conversion box Connection cable 2) Option device*4 Model Max.
PAGE 185
Connection cable 2) Option device*4 Max. distance Model *2 - Main base - - - (Built into GOT) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 *3 - (Built into GOT) GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15-A1SC07NB(0.
PAGE 186
 When two GOTs are connected Extension base unit Bus extension connector box Main base unit 1st GOT 2nd GOT Communication driver Bus(A/QnA) Extension cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3) PLC*5 Extension base - Extension *1 cable - Main base GOT (1st)*3 Connection cable 1) Main base Bus connector conversion box - - - - Connection cable 2) *6*7 GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.
PAGE 187
PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 GOT (2nd)*3*5 GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING - (Built into GOT) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.
PAGE 188
 When three GOTs are connected Extension base unit Main base unit Extension cable 2nd GOT 1st GOT Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3) 3rd GOT Connection cable 4) PLC*3 Extension base Extension cable *1 - - Extension base Extension cable Main base Connection cable 1) Main base *1 *2 *3 GOT (1st)*2 Main base Bus connector conversion box - - Option device *5*6 - GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-A1SC50B(5m) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 - GT15-A1SC07B(0.
PAGE 189
Communication driver GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 *5*6 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) *4 *4 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 *4 *4 *5 *6 When using GT15-C GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 Max.
PAGE 190
5.2.4 Connection to A0J2HCPU Power supply module PLC GOT Communication driver Bus(A/QnA) Connection cable 2) Connection cable 1) GOT1000 series*1 PLC Model name Connection cable 1) A0J2HCPU A0J2C03(0.3m) A0J2C06(0.55m) A0J2C10(1m) A0J2C20(2m) *1 *2 5 - 18 Power supply module A0J2-PW Connection cable 2) Max. distance Option device*2 GT15-J2C10B(1m) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 Model Between PLC and GOT: 6.
PAGE 191
1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Connection to motion controller CPU (A273UCPU, A273UHCPU(-S3), A373UCPU(-S3))  When one GOT is connected Communication driver Bus(A/QnA) Connection cable 2) Main base Extens ion base Extension cable 3 GOT1000 Series Connection cable 1) Bus connector conversion Connection cable 2) Option device *3 Max. distance Model box*1 - - GT15-A370C12B-S1(1.2m) GT15-A370C25B-S1(2.
PAGE 192
 When two GOTs are connected Extension base unit Main base unit Bus extension connector box 2nd GOT 1st GOT Communication driver Bus(A/QnA) Connection cable 3) Connection cable 2) Connection cable 1) Extension cable PLC*4 Main base Main base Main base GOT (1st)*2 Extension base Extension cable - Connection cable 1) Bus connector conversion box - - GT15-A370C12B(1.2m) GT15-A370C25B(2.5m) A7GT-CNB*1 - - GT15-AC06B(0.6m) GT15-AC12B(1.
PAGE 193
PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 GOT (2nd)*2*4 Connection cable 3) Max. distance GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C300BS(30m) 3 Model ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Option device*5*6 Between main base and GOT(1st): 2.5m Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m - (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 32.
PAGE 194
 When 2 to 3 GOTs are connected*2 Extension base unit Main base unit 1st GOT Connection cable 3) Connection cable 2) Extension cable 2nd GOT 3rd GOT Connection cable 4) PLC*2 GOT (1st)*1 Connection cable 2) Extension base Extension cable Main base Connection cable 1) Bus connector conversion box - - Main base - - GT15-A370C12B-S1(1.2m) GT15-A370C25B-S1(2.5m) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 Extension base GT15-A370C12B(1.2m) GT15-A370C25B(2.5m) Main base - - GT15-C12NB(1.
PAGE 195
Communication driver GOT (3rd)*2*3 Connection cable 4) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) *3 *3 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.
PAGE 196
5.2.6 Connecting to motion controller CPU (A171SCPU(-S3(N)), A171SHCPU(N), A172SHCPU(N), A173UHCPU(-S1))  When one GOT is connected Main base unit Extension base unit Bus extension connector box GOT Communication driver Bus(A/QnA) Extension cable Connection cable 2) Connection cable 1) PLC Main base Extension cable Extens ion *1 base*2 GOT1000 Series Connection cable 1) - Bus connector conversion box - Connection cable 2) GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.
PAGE 197
*2 - Bus connector conversion box - Connection cable 2) GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-A1SC30B(3m) Option device*5 GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 - (Built into GOT) Extens ion base - - *4 - (Built into GOT) GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15-A1SC07NB(0.
PAGE 198
 When two GOTs are connected Extension base unit Main base unit Bus extension connector box 1st GOT 2nd GOT Communication driver Bus(A/QnA) Extension cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3) PLC*5 Main base Main base Extension Extension cable*1 base*2 - GOT (1st)*4 Connection cable 1) Bus connector conversion box - - - - - Connection cable 2) Option device*7*8 GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.
PAGE 199
PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 GOT (2nd)*4*6 Max. distance GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C300BS(30m) Model 3 GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 Between main base and GOT(1st): 3m - (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 33m ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Option device*7*8 Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m *5 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.
PAGE 200
 When 2 to 3 GOTs are connected*4 Extension base unit Main base unit 1st GOT Connection cable 2) Extension cable 2nd GOT Connection cable 3) PLC*3 Main base Extension *1 cable Extension base *2 3rd GOT Connection cable 4) GOT (1st)*3 Connection cable 1) Bus connector conversion box Connection cable 2) Option device*6*7 Main base - - - - GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 Main base Extension cable Extension base - - GT15-A1SC07B(0.
PAGE 201
Communication driver GOT (3rd)*3*4 GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) *5 *5 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.
PAGE 202
5.3 GOT Side Settings 5.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 5.3.2 Communication detail settings (1) Bus(Q) Set the channel of the connected equipment. 2. 3. 4. Item 2. 3. 4. Select [Common] menu. 1 to 7 Slot No. (Default: 0) 0 to 9 Monitor Speed Set the monitor speed of the GOT. This setting is not valid in all systems. (Default: Normal) Timeout Time (Sec.) Set the time period for a communication to time out.
PAGE 203
(1) When connecting to QCPU (Q mode) Set an additional stage (16 points 10 slots) for GOT connection, and assign a GOT to one of the I/O slots. (The GOT cannot be assigned to empty slots of the main base unit or extension base unit.) Extension base unit Q68B BUS CONNECTION Empty Empty Stage No. setting connector Stage No. Slot No. :2 :0 Stage No. Slot No. :2 :1 Stage No. Slot No. 6 :2 :2 7 POINT When using the bus extension connector box Set the Stage No.
PAGE 204
POINT HINT When connecting to motion controller CPU (Q Series) In the [Base Setting] on MT Developer, set "10" to the number of slots for the extension base used for GOT connection. Example: When setting "2" to Stage No. and "0" to Slot No. in the communication interface settings, set "10" to [2nd Stage].
PAGE 205
1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING (2) Other than QCPU (Q mode) Assign the GOT to an empty I/O slot on the extension base unit. When there is no extension base unit or no empty I/O slots are left on an extension base unit, set an additional stage, and assign the GOT to one of the I/O slots. (Assigning the GOT to an empty slot on the main base unit is not allowed.
PAGE 206
5.4 Precautions 5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS (b) When using GT15-C BS Follow the GOT side grounding steps in (a) above for both GOTs. (1) Composition of GT15-C EXSS-1 It is composed of GT15-EXCNB (0.5m) and GT15C BS (10 to 30m). Calculate the cable length based on GT15-C100EXSS1(10m), GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) and GT15C300EXSS-1(30m).
PAGE 207
(2) When turning OFF the GOT before display of the user creation screen When the GOT is turned OFF before the user creation screen is displayed on the GOT, subsequent communications may be no longer possible. In such a case, reapply the power to the PLC CPU and GOT. (3) Precautions for connection of 3 GOTs or more (when connecting QCPU (Q mode)) 5.4.10 (1)Restrictions in overall cable length to No. of GOTs 5.4.
PAGE 208
5.4.8 When designing the system When the GOT is OFF, the following currents are supplied to the GOT from the PLC CPU side (the power supply module on the main base unit).(The GOT does not operate when it is OFF.) Design the system so that the 5V DC current consumption of the modules on the main base unit and the total current consumption of the GOTs will not exceed the rated output current of 5V DC of the power supply module in use.
PAGE 209
Stage No. Slot No. A1 CPU/A2USCPU(-S1) /QnAS(H)CPU(-S1) 1 2 0 A2 CPU/Q2ACPU 3 4 0 A3 CPU/A4 7 3 Cannot be used When connecting to QA1S68B Extension base unit Communication interface setting Max. stage No. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Q38B Main base unit Q68B Extension base unit 2 5.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Stage No. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Even if the max.
PAGE 210
5.4.12 When connecting multiple GOTs (1) System including different GOT series The GOT1000 series can be connected with GOT-A900 series in a system. When using them together, refer to the following Technical News. Precautions when Replacing GOT-A900 Series with GOT1000 Series (GOT-A-0009) The GOT1000 series cannot be used with GOTs other than GOT-A900 series in a system. GOT1000 GOT-A900 GOT800 5.4.
PAGE 211
(1) When the GOT is bus-connected to a Q4ARCPU redundant system Connect the GOT to the last redundant extension base unit (A68RB) of the Q4ARCPU redundant system. For the redundant extension base units, use version B or later. The version can be confirmed in the DATE field of the rating plate. 5.4.15 1 When monitoring the Q170MCPU Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2). When the CPU No.
PAGE 212
5 - 40 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.
PAGE 213
6 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 6.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 6.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6 6.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 22 6.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 214
6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to Q00JCPU Q00CPU*1 Q01CPU*1 Q02CPU*1 RS-232 RS-422 Q02HCPU*1 Q06HCPU*1 Q12HCPU*1 6.2.
PAGE 215
Communication type Refer to L02CPU*1 L26CPU*1 RS-232 RS-422 *1 L02CPU-P 6.2.2 L26CPU-PBT*1 2 L02SCPU MELSEC-Q (A mode) Q02CPU-A RS-232 RS-422 Q02HCPU-A Q06HCPU-A 6.2.1 Q2ACPU MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU)*3 Q2ACPU-S1 RS-422 Q3ACPU 6.2.3 Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU 3 RS-422 Q2ASCPU MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1 (QnASCPU)*3 Q2ASHCPU RS-422 6.2.
PAGE 216
Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) A2SCPU*1 A2SCPU-S1*1 RS-422 6.2.4 RS-422 6.2.4 RS-422 6.2.4 RS-232 RS-422 6.2.
PAGE 217
Refer to RS-422 A273UHCPU RS-422 A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3 A171SCPU 2 RS-422 A171SCPU-S3 6.2.4 A171SCPU-S3N A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU RS-422 A172SHCPUN 3 A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU0 RS-232 WS0-CPU1 6.2.6 MELSECNET/ H Remote I/O station QJ72LP25G CC-Link IE Field Network head module LJ72GF15-T2 - - CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF-ETB - - CNC C70 Q173NCCPU RS-232 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 6.2.
PAGE 218
6.2 System Configuration 6.2.1 Connecting to QCPU Communication driver Communication driver A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24 QnA/L/Q CPU MELSEC-A ( For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11) ( For GT10, when connecting to QCPU(Q mode)) ( For GT10, when connecting to QCPU(A mode)) RS-422 connector conversion cable QCPU Communication driver GOT Connection cable PLC Model name Connection cable RS-422 connector conversion cable Communi cation type Cable model GOT Max.
PAGE 219
1 Connecting to LCPU Communication driver Communication driver A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24 QnA/L/Q CPU ( For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11) ( For GT10) PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 6.2.2 LCPU RS-422 connector conversion cable Adapter DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 GOT Connection cable Adapter Communi cation type Max.
PAGE 220
6.2.3 Connecting to QnACPU QnACPU Communication driver Communication driver A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24 QnA/L/Q CPU ( For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11) ( For GT10) GOT Connection cable PLC Model name Connection cable Communication type Cable model GOT Max.
PAGE 221
Communication driver A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24 MELSEC-A ( For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11) ( For GT10) 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET ACPU Communication driver GOT Connection cable Model name Connection cable Communication type Cable model GOT Max.
PAGE 222
6.2.5 Connecting to FXCPU Function expansion board FXCPU Function adapter GOT Communication driver Connection cable MELSEC-FX  When connecting to FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FX2 or FX2C PLC Model name Function expansion Connection cable Function adapter*5 board*5 Communi cation type Cable model GOT Max.
PAGE 223
board Function adapter*7 *4*7 GOT Max.
PAGE 224
*6 6 - 12 GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs. *7 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION When using function expansion boards or function adapters, confirm the communication settings. *8 6.5 Precautions Connection to FXCPU (2)When connecting with function extension board or communication special adapter Use the RS-422 connection model. 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.
PAGE 225
- RS232 connection RS-232 diagram 4) GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or FX1S FX1N FX2N FX2NC -232ADP RS232 connection RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 4) GT01-C30R2-25P(3m) or FX0N -232ADP RS232 connection RS-232 diagram 5) GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or RS232 connection RS-232 diagram 4) - GT01-C30R2-25P(3m) or FX0N -232ADP RS-232 RS232 connection 15m diagram 5) - (Built into GOT) *5 3 - (Built into GOT) 15m GT15-RS2-9P GT01-RS4-M*2 15m - (Built into GOT) *5 4 - (Built into GOT) 15m GT15-RS2-9P GT01-RS4-M
PAGE 226
 When connecting to FX3G (RS-422 connection) PLC Model name Function expansion Connection cable Function adapter*6 board*6 Communi cation type Cable model GOT Max.
PAGE 227
- RS-232 diagram 4) FX3G GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or FX3G-CNV-ADP + FX3U-232ADP - RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 4) *1 *2 2 15m GT15-RS2-9P 15m GT01-RS4-M*1 - - (Built into GOT) *4 1 GOT for 1 function expansion board 3 - (Built into GOT) 15m 1 GOT for 1 function adapter GT15-RS2-9P diagram 1) RS232 connection *2 - (Built into GOT) diagram 1) RS232 connection Model DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET FX3G-232-BD RS232 connection Option device 15m GT01-RS4-M*1 - - (Built into GOT) *4 A
PAGE 228
 When connecting to FX3GC (FX3GCPLC Model name /D, FX3GC- /DSS) (RS-422 connection) Connection cable Communication type GOT Max. distance Cable model Option device Number of connectable Model equipment*4 GT16-C02R4-9S(0.
PAGE 229
Max.
PAGE 230
 When connecting to FX3U or FX3UC (FX3UCPLC Model name Function expansion board *3 -LT(-2)) (RS-232 connection) Connection cable Function adapter*3 Commun ication type Cable model Connection diagram number GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or FX3U-232-BD - RS232 connection RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 4) Option device Model Number of connectable equipment *2 - (Built into GOT) 15m GT15-RS2-9P 15m GT01-RS4-M*1 - - (Built into GOT) *4 1 GOT for 1 function expansion board GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or FX3U-42
PAGE 231
/DS, FX3UC- 1 /DSS) (RS-422 connection) GOT Max. distance Number of connectable Option device equipment*4 Model 2 GT16-C02R4-9S(0.
PAGE 232
6.2.6 Connecting to WSCPU Communication driver WSCPU GOT MELSEC-WS Connection cable PLC Model name Connection cable Communication type GOT Cable model Connection diagram number Max. distance WS0-C20R2(2m) 2m Option device Number of connectable equipment Model - (Built into GOT) MELSEC-WS RS-232 1 GOT for 1 PLC GT15-RS2-9P WS0-C20R2(2m) + 2.3m RS232 connection *1 - (Built into GOT) diagram 6) *1 6.2.7 Use the RS-232 connection model.
PAGE 233
POINT When connecting to the motion controller CPU (Q Series) other than Q170MCPU, MR-MQ100 A motion controller CPU (Q Series) mounted to the multiple CPU system of the QCPU (Q mode) can be monitored. The system configuration, connection conditions, and system equipment for connecting a GOT to a motion controller CPU (Q Series) are the same as those for connecting to the QCPU. 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 6.2.
PAGE 234
6.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC. 6.3.
PAGE 235
1 RS422 connection diagram 2) GOT side (terminal block) Untied wire color of GT10-C□□□R4-25P PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING  Precautions when preparing a cable (1) Cable length (2) GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. 1.4.
PAGE 236
RS422 connection diagram 5) GOT side (terminal block) United wire color of Q170MIOCBL1M-A SDA Yellow(Dot mark:Black) SDB Yellow(Dot mark:Red) RDA Pink(Dot mark:Black) RDB Pink(Dot mark:Red) SG White(Dot mark:Black) RSA White(Dot mark:Red) RSB CSA CSB  Precautions when preparing a cable (1) Cable length The length of the RS-422 cable must be within the maximum distance specifications. (2) GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. 1.4.
PAGE 237
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Make the settings according to the usage environment. GOT Multi- Drop Connection When using the serial multi-drop connection unit, refer to the following. 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 6.4.2Communication detail settings POINT Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. POINT 3 The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting].
PAGE 238
Item Description Format*3 Select the communication format. (Default: 1) Monitor Speed (GT16 only) Set the monitor speed of the GOT. This setting is not valid in all systems. (Default: Normal) *1 *2 *3 Range (b) For GT10 1, 2 High*1 Normal Low*2 This is effective when collecting a large data on other than the monitor screen (logging, recipe function, etc.). However, when connecting to Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU, the sequence scan time may be influenced.
PAGE 239
(1) Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GT User's Manual (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.
PAGE 240
6.5 Precautions  Connection to FXCPU (1) When connecting to FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC series When the keyword of FXCPU (FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/ FX3UC series) has been set, GOT may not be able to monitoring.Perform an I/O check again. ( ■ Perform an I/O check) When the result of the I/ O check is normal, check the status of keyword registration.
PAGE 241
7 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 4 7.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 7.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 7 7.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 15 7.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 242
7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. 7.1.1 Series PLC/Motion controller CPU Model name Clock Communication Refer to Q00JCPU Q00CPU*1 Q01CPU*1 Q02CPU*1 RS-232 RS-422 Q02HCPU*1 7.2.1 Q06HCPU*1 Q12HCPU*1 Q25HCPU*1 Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU RS-232 RS-422 *2 *2 - *2 *2 RS-232 RS-422 *2 *2 7.2.1 Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU (Main base) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) Q25PRHCPU (Extension base) - 7.2.
PAGE 243
QS001CPU Refer to RS-232 RS-422 7.2.1 - - L02CPU 2 L26CPU MELSEC-L L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P RS-232 RS-422 7.2.2 RS-232 RS-422 7.2.3 L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU MELSEC-Q (A mode) Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A Q06HCPU-A 3 Q2ACPU Q2ACPU-S1 MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) *3 Q3ACPU RS-232 RS-422 7.2.4 Q4ACPU RS-232 RS-422 Q4ARCPU Q2ASCPU *3 Q2ASCPU-S1 Q2ASHCPU RS-232 RS-422 7.2.
PAGE 244
Series Model name Clock Communication Refer to A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU*1 MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) A2SCPU*1 A2SCPU-S1*1 RS-232 RS-422 7.2.7 RS-232 RS-422 7.2.7 A2SHCPU*1 A2SHCPU-S1*1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU*1 A0J2HCPU*1 A0J2HCPUP21*1 A0J2HCPUR21 *1 A0J2HCPU-DC24*1 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 - - A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU RS-232 RS-422 - 7.2.
PAGE 245
Refer to A273UCPU A273UHCPU RS-232 RS-422 7.2.6 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3N A171SHCPU*2 A171SHCPUN*2 RS-232 RS-422 7.2.7 A172SHCPU*2 3 A172SHCPUN*2 A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 MELSEC-WS MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station CC-Link IE Field Network head module WS0-CPU0 - WS0-CPU1 - QJ72LP25-25 QJ72LP25G RS-232 RS-422 *1 RS-232 RS-422 *3 7.2.1 4 QJ72BR15 LJ72GF15-T2 *3 *3 7.2.2 CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF-ETB - CNC C70 Q173NCCPU RS-232 RS-422 7.
PAGE 246
7.1.
PAGE 247
7.2.1 Connecting to QCPU (Q mode) Communication driver Communication driver A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24 QnA/L/Q CPU ( For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11) ( For GT10) PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 7.
PAGE 248
7.2.2 Connecting to LCPU Serial communication module LCPU Communication driver Communication driver A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24 QnA/L/Q CPU ( For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11) ( For GT10) GOT Connection cable PLC Model name Connection cable Serial communication module*1 Communi cation type Cable model GT09-C30R2-9P(3m) or LJ71C24 LJ71C24-R2 RS232 connection RS-232 GOT Max.
PAGE 249
1 Connecting to QCPU (A mode) Communication driver Communication driver A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24 AJ71C24/UC24 ( For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11) ( For GT10) PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 7.2.
PAGE 250
7.2.
PAGE 251
AJ71UC24 RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 4) RS422 connection diagram 2) MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) AJ71UC24 RS-422 - (Built into GOT) 15m GT15-RS2-9P diagram 2) RS232 connection GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) or GT01-RS4-M*3 15m - (Built into GOT) 500m - (Built into GOT) 7.2.
PAGE 252
PLC Connection cable Serial communication Model name module /Computer link module*1 Commun ication type Cable model RS422 connection diagram 2) MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) A1SJ71QC24 A1SJ71QC24N A1SJ71QC24N1 RS-422 GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) or GOT Max.
PAGE 253
1 Connecting to ACPU (AnCPU type) Computer link module ACPU (AnCPU type) GOT Communication driver PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 7.2.
PAGE 254
7.2.7 Connecting to ACPU (AnSCPU type, A0J2HCPU, A2CCPUC) ACPU (AnSPU type) (A0J2HCPU,A2CCPUC) Computer link module GOT Communication driver Connection cable AJ71C24/UC24 PLC Model name Connection cable Computer link module *1 A1SJ71UC24-R2 A1SJ71C24-R2 A1SJ71UC24-PRF A1SJ71C24-PRF A1SCPUC24-R2 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF Commun ication type Cable model GT09-C30R2-9P(3m) or RS232 connection RS-232 diagram 3) RS422 connection diagram 2) A1SJ71UC24-R4 A1SJ71C24-R4 RS-422 Max.
PAGE 255
1 PLC side connector D-sub 25-pin For GT16, GT15 PLC side connector D-sub 9-pin For GT16, GT15 GOT side (D-Sub 9-pin) PLC side CD 1 4 RS(RTS) RD(RXD) 2 2 SD(TXD) SD(TXD) 3 3 RD(RXD) ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR) CD 1 7 RS(RTS) SG 5 7 SG RD(RXD) 2 3 SD(TXD) DR(DSR) 6 20 ER(DTR) SD(TXD) 3 2 RD(RXD) RS(RTS) 7 8 CD 8 5 CS(CTS) 9 1 FG ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR) CS(CTS) SG 5 5 SG - DR(DSR) 6 4 ER(DTR) RS(RTS) 7 1 CD CS(CTS) 8 8 CS(CTS) - 9 9 - GOT side (
PAGE 256
RS232 connection diagram 3) RS232 connection diagram 4) PLC side connector D-sub 9-pin PLC side connector D-sub 25-pin For GT1030, GT1020 (When connecting to the Q/QnA/L Serial Communication Module) For GT1030, GT1020 (When connecting to the Q/QnA Serial Communication Module) GOT side (terminal block) GOT side (terminal block) PLC side PLC side SD 2 RD(RXD) SD 3 RD(RXD) RD 3 SD(TXD) RD 2 SD(TXD) ER 6 DR(DSR) ER 6 DR(DSR) DR 4 ER(DTR) DR 20 ER(DTR) SG 5 SG SG 7 SG RS
PAGE 257
GOT side (terminal block) PLC side RS422 connection diagram 1) (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 ), Serial Multi-Drop Unit GOT side PLC side SDA RDA RDA SDA RSA R SDA 1 RDA CSA RDA 2 SDA SG SG RSA 3 - SDB RDB CSA 4 - RDB SDB SG 5 SG RSB - SDB 6 RDB CSB - RDB 7 SDB RSB 8 - CSB 9 - FG - FG FG RS422 connection diagram 4) (For GT1030, GT1020) RS422 connection diagram 2) (For GT16) Untied wire color of GT10-C□□□R4-25P Brown SDA GOT side PL
PAGE 258
 Connecting terminating resistors (1) GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT, a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT. (a) For GT16, GT15, GT12 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable". (b) For GT14, GT11, GT10 Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ". For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer to the following. 1.4.
PAGE 259
1 POINT The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Set the channel of the connected equipment. 1.1.2 I/F communication setting 2. 3. 7.4.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. 4. (1) A/QnA/L/Q CPU, LJ71C24, QJ71C24 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 7.4.
PAGE 260
Item Description Monitor Speed (GT16 only) *1 *2 *3 Range Set the monitor speed of the GOT. This setting is not valid in all systems. (Default: Normal) (2) AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6* High*1 Normal Low*2 This is effective when collecting a large data on other than the monitor screen (logging, recipe function, etc.). However, when connecting to Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU, the sequence scan time may be influenced. If you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time, do not set "High".
PAGE 261
1 (4) QnA/L/Q CPU (GT10) PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING (3) AJ71C24/UC24 8bit (fixed) Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications. (Default: 1bit) 1bit (fixed) Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check, and how it is performed during communication. (Default: Odd) Odd (fixed) Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out.
PAGE 262
7.5 PLC Side Setting The GOT operates under the following transmission specifications when it is connected to a Mitsubishi PLC in the computer link connection. Transmission specifications Connecting serial communication module (Q, L Series) Setting Data bit 8bits Parity bit Yes (Odd) Stop bit 1bit Sum check Yes Transmission speed (Baud rate) Set the same transmission speed on both the GOT and the PLC.
PAGE 263
b0 OFF Operation setting b1 OFF Data bit b2 OFF Parity bit b3 OFF Even/odd parity b4 OFF b5 OFF Set Description b6 OFF Write during RUN b7 OFF Setting modifications b8 to b15 ― Model QJ71C24N(-R2/R4) (Operates according to the GOT side specificatio ns.) - LJ71C24(-R2) : 2 GOTs connectable, 0000H : 1 GOT connectable, -: Not applicable (3) When connecting to the modem interface module When the modem interface module is connected, only CH2 can be used.
PAGE 264
7.5.2 Connecting serial communication module (QnA Series) POINT When connecting a GOT to CH2 Set the CH1 side mode switch to any other than "0" (interlocked operation). POINT CH1 CH2 Serial communication module (QnA Series) For details of the serial communication module (QnA Series), refer to the following manual.
PAGE 265
SW09 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON SW10 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON SW11 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON SW12 *1 *2 Set the Mode setting switch, the Transmission specifications switches and the Station number setting switches. AJ71UC24 A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-PRF, A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71C24-PRF AJ71UC24 RUN 2 - SD 2 - RD L1 L2 L3 2-C/N 2-P/S 2 - PRO 2 - SIO 4-C/N 4-P/S 4 - PRO 4 - SIO 2 - NEU 2 - ACK 2 - NAK 4 - NEU 4 - ACK 4 - NAK 4 - SD 4 - RD L4 L5 L6 CPUR / W COM M.D.M M.D.
PAGE 266
(b) A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-PRF, A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71C24-PRF (1) Mode setting switch Contents BCD Dedicated protocol type 1 012 67 EF 8 9A Mode setting switch Set value RS-232 connection 1 RS-422 connection 5 345 (2) Transmission specifications switch Setting switch SW11 SW12 SW13 SW14 SW15 SW16 SW17 SW18 RS-422 connection ON Data bit setting 8bits ON Transmission speed setting (Consistent See with the GOT descripti side ons specifications) below.
PAGE 267
OFF ON OFF SW06 OFF OFF ON SW07 ON ON ON Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown. (d) A1SCPUC24-R2 Enabled Transmission speed setting (Consistent with the GOT side specification s) 5 Data bit setting 8bits ON 6 Parity bit setting Set ON 7 Even/odd parity setting Odd OFF 8 Stop bit setting 1bit 9 Sum check setting Set See description s below.
PAGE 268
POINT When connecting the GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 and the computer link unit When the GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 and the computer link unit are connected via RS-232C, set the buffer memory in the computer link unit using the sequence program so that CD signals are not checked. Examples of the CPU units equipped with built-in computer link are explained below also. (1) In the case of A computer link Refer to the program example below in which the I/O signals of the computer link unit are 80 to 9F (H).
PAGE 269
1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 7.6 Precautions  Time taken until the PLC runs when connected in the multiple CPU system The following time is taken until the PLC runs. QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10 seconds or more 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system alarm occurs.Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs.
PAGE 270
7 - 30 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.
PAGE 271
8 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 8.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 2 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 8.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7 8.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 15 8.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 272
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.1 Connectable Model List 8.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the connectable models. Series Model name Clock Communication type *3 Refer to Q00JCPU Q00CPU*1 Q01CPU*1 Q02CPU*1 Q02HCPU*1 Q06HCPU*1 Q12HCPU*1 Q25HCPU*1 Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU (Main base) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) Ethernet 8.2.
PAGE 273
Refer to Ethernet 8.2.1 L02CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT 8.2.2 Ethernet L02CPU-P 8.2.1 L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU Q02CPU-A*3 MELSEC-Q (A mode) Q02HCPU-A*3 Q06HCPU-A Ethernet 8.2.1 *3 Q2ACPU*3 3 Q2ACPU-S1*3 MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) Q3ACPU*3 Ethernet *1 *1 *1 *1 8.2.1 Ethernet *1 *1 *1 *1 8.2.
PAGE 274
Series Model name Clock Communication type *4 Refer to A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) A2SCPU Ethernet 8.2.1 Ethernet 8.2.1 A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 - - A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU Q172CPU*1*2 Q173CPU*1*2 Q172CPUN*1 Q173CPUN*1 Ethernet 8.2.
PAGE 275
Clock Communication type *3 Refer to A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3N Ethernet 8.2.1 A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU-S1 MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station CC-Link IE Field Network head module WS0-CPU0 - WS0-CPU1 - QJ72LP25-25 QJ72LP25G Ethernet 8.2.
PAGE 276
8.1.
PAGE 277
1 Connection to Ethernet module  When connecting to MELSEC-Q, QS, QnA, A or motion controller MELSEC-QS Motion controller length*3 MELSEC-A MELSEC-Q (A mode) Motion controller CPU (A Series) Option device Model Number of connectable equipment *2 - (Built into GOT) QJ71E71-100 QJ71E71-B5 QJ71E71-B2 QJ71E71 Ethernet *8*9 100m AJ71QE71N3-T AJ71QE71N-B5 AJ71QE71N-B2 AJ71QE71N-T AJ71QE71N-B5T AJ71QE71 AJ71QE71-B5 A1SJ71QE71N3-T A1SJ71QE71N-B5 A1SJ71QE71N-B2 A1SJ71QE71N-T A1SJ71QE71N-B5T A1SJ71QE7
PAGE 278
*3 *4 A length between a hub and a node. The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. • 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m) • 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.
PAGE 279
1 Ethernet module PLC CPU PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING  When connecting to MELSEC-FX Communication driver GOT Connection cable Ethernet (FX), Gateway Model name Ethernet module Communication type *4*5 Connection cable*1 Maximum segment Cable model length*3 GOT Option device Model Number of connectable equipment *2 - (Built into GOT) FX3U-ENET Ethernet 3 *7 100m ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING MELSEC-FX (FX3U, FX3G) GT15-J71E71-100 2 GOTs *2 - (Built into GOT) Ethernet FX3U-
PAGE 280
*6 *7 *8 *9 8 - 10 When using an Ethernet module with the FX3UC series, FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V is required. GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. When using an Ethernet module with the FX3U series, FX3U-CNV-BD, FX3U-422-BD, or FX3U-232-BD is required. FX3U-ENET-ADP occupies one extension communication adapter CH (Max. 2 CHs) of the FX3U(C). One CPU allows the connection of only one FX3U-ENET-ADP. 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.
PAGE 281
Connection cable*1*2 Maximum segment length*4 GOT Option device Number of connectable equipment Model *3 - (Built into GOT) MELSEC-QnUDE(H) Ethernet *5*6 *9 16 GOTs 100m GT15-J71E71-100 Ethernet 4 *3 - (Built into GOT) *9 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM C Controller module Twisted pair cable • 10BASE-T Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP): Category 3, 4, and 5 • 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e 16 GOTs 100m GT15-J71E71-1
PAGE 282
8.2.
PAGE 283
Communication driver Ethernet(MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700 MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Motion Controller CPU (Q Series) QJ71GF11-T2 Doubleshielded twisted pair Max.
PAGE 284
8.2.
PAGE 285
8.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 8.3.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.  GT16, GT14 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Set the channel of the connected equipment. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 8.3 GOT Side Settings 2. 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3. 4. GOT PLC No. Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 64 Set the IP address of the GOT. (Default: 192.168.3.18) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.
PAGE 286
*1 *2 To connect the GOT with the Ethernet module (Q Series) in the one-on-one relationship using a cross cable, set [Timeout Time] to 6sec. or longer. Click the [Setting] button and perform the setting in the [GOT IP Address Setting] screen.  GT15 Item Set the network No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 239 GOT PLC No. Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 64 GOT IP address Set the IP address of the GOT. (Default: 192.168.0.18) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.
PAGE 287
8.3.3 1 Ethernet setting PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING POINT (1) Example of [Detail setting]. For examples of [Detail setting], refer to the following. 8.4 PLC Side Setting (2) Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. Range Host The host is displayed.
PAGE 288
8.3.4 POINT Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. (1) Example of [Ethernet setting] For examples of [Ethernet setting], refer to the following. 8.4 PLC Side Setting (2) Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator (a) The color of the cells for the items which are reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT Navigator changes to green. Set items, which are displayed in green cells, from the MELSOFT Navigator. (b) When the settings of N/W No., PLC No.
PAGE 289
1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING POINT (1) Routing parameter setting of relay station Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the relay station. For the setting, refer to the following. 2 8.4 PLC Side Setting DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET (2) Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator (a) The color of the cells for the items which are reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT Navigator changes to green. Set items, which are displayed in green cells, from the MELSOFT Navigator.
PAGE 290
8.4 PLC Side Setting Model Reference Built-in Ethernet port QCPU Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU, Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU 8.4.1 8.4.2 C Controller module Q12DCCPU-V Q24DHCCPU-V 8.4.4 Built-in Ethernet port LCPU L02CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P L26CPU-PBT 8.4.1 8.4.
PAGE 291
(1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows. POINT Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of 8.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) (2) Ethernet setting When connecting Built-in Ethernet port QCPU or LCPU to a GOT, the settings items for the network No. and station No. do not exist at the PLC side. However, these virtual values must be set on the GOT side. Therefore, set the network No. and station No. Therefore, set the network No. and station No. Set the network No.
PAGE 292
8.4.2 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU (multiple connection) This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built-in Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system configuration.  [Q parameter setting] or [L parameter setting] for GX Developer (1) Built-in Ethernet port Example: [Q parameter setting] screen POINT Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU For details of Built-in Ethernet port CPU, refer to the following manual.
PAGE 293
PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Designer3 POINT (3) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. (4) Ethernet setting When connecting Built-in Ethernet port CPU to a GOT, the settings items for the network No. and station No. do not exist at the PLC side. However, these virtual values must be set on the GOT side. Therefore, set the network No. and station No. Set the network No.
PAGE 294
 Checking communication state of Connecting 8.4.3 to Built-in Ethernet port CPU (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows. Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. (a) When normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.1 Reply from 192.168.0.1: bytes=32 time <10ms TTL=32 (b) When abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.1 Request timed out. This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module (Q Series) in the following case of the system configuration.
PAGE 295
1 (2) Operation setting PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING  [Network parameter] of GX Developer (1) Network parameter DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 Starting I/O No.*1 Send frame setting 0 (fixed) *3 Mode : As necessary : Not necessary Because port No. 5001 is fixed, these items operate at the following setting without relations to the setting given here. Online (fixed) Operation setting 5 : Necessary *1 2 Station No.
PAGE 296
(3) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.  [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 (1) Controller setting Item Set value (Use default value) GOT NET No. 1 GOT PLC No. 1 GOT IP Address 192.168.0.18 GOT Port No.
PAGE 297
(2) When abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again. • Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit • Cable connecting condition • Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting • Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) • IP address of GOT specified by Ping command 2 POINT C Controller module For details of C Controller module, refer to the following manual.
PAGE 298
 Utility setting for C Controller module (c) Detail settings (1) Q12DCCPU-V Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the C Controller setting utility. (a) Connection settings Item Set value Target module*1 192.168.3.3 (Default) Write authority target Password*2 password Detailed settings *2 Item IP address Subnet mask - : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary If the IP address of the C Controller module has been changed, input the changed IP address or host name.
PAGE 299
1 (2) Q24DHCCPU-V Use SW4PVC-CCPU-E for the C Controller setting utility. (a) Connection settings PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING (d) System settings Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Item DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 Remote reset Output mode at STOP to RUN WDT (Watchdog timer) setting IP Address*1 192.168.3.39 (Default) Subnet Mask 255.255.255.
PAGE 300
8.4.5 (1) Controller setting Item Set value (Use default value) GOT NET No. 1 GOT PLC No. 1 GOT IP Address This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module (QnA Series) in the following case of the system configuration. 192.168.3.18 GOT Port No. (Communication) 5001 GOT Port No. (Ethernet Download) 5014 Default Gateway POINT Ethernet module (QnA Series) For details of the Ethernet module (QnA Series), refer to the following manual. 0.0.0.0 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.
PAGE 301
TEST TEST ERR.
PAGE 302
 [Network parameter] of GX Developer (1) Network parameter (2) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s. Item Item Set value Network type Ethernet (fixed) Start I/O No. 0000H Network No.*1 Setting necessity at GOT connection 0 (fixed) Station No.*2 192.168.
PAGE 303
RUN BUF1 BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8 RDY BSY SW.ERR. COM.ERR. CPU R/W A1SJ71QE71N3-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5, A1SJ71QE71N-B2, A1SJ71QE71N-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T,A1SJ71QE71-B5, A1SJ71QE71-B2 RUN RDY BSY SW.ERR. COM.ERR. TEST TEST ERR. CPU R/W BUF1 BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8 Ethernet module (A Series) For details of the Ethernet module (A Series), refer to the following manual.
PAGE 304
 Switch settings of Ethernet module (1) Operation mode setting switch Set the operation mode setting switch and exchange condition setting switch. AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5, AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N-T, AJ71E71N-B5T, AJ71E71-S3 A J71E71N3-T RUN A1SJ71E71N3-T, A1SJ71E71N-B5, A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-T, A1SJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3, A1SJ71E71-B2-S3 *2 A1SJ71E71N3-T RUN RDY BSY SW.ERR. COM.ERR. TEST TEST ERR. CPU R/W BUF1 BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8 RDY BSY SW.ERR. COM.ERR.
PAGE 305
D110 Application setting D111 Port No. of Ethernet module D112 to D113 IP address of GOT D114 Port No. of GOT D200 Initial fault code 100H 24 (18H) Port No. of Ethernet module 5001 IP address of GOT FFFFFFFFH 27 (1BH) Port No. of GOT FFFFH (fixed) 80 (50H) Initial fault code ― *1 The details of the application setting are shown below. Settings 1), 2) and 3) can be changed by the user. 4), 5) and 6) are fixed.
PAGE 306
(2) Example of sequence program * Initial processing Turned on WDT at first scan ERR only while detection running IP address of Ethernet module(192.168.0.19) Initial request Read the initial fault code. Initial WDT ERR fault detection detection COM. ERR turned off request COM. ERR turned off command Clear the initial fault code. * Opening processing of communication line Set to the permit of communication while stopping the PLC CPU. Initial request Normal No.
PAGE 307
1 GOT PLC No. 1 GOT IP Address 192.168.0.18 GOT Port No. (Communication) 5001 GOT Port No. (Ethernet Download) 5014 BUF1 BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8 Subnet Mask 3 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 Retry 3times Startup Time 3sec Timeout Time 3sec Delay Time 0ms 4 (2) Ethernet setting Item Ethernet setting No.1 Set value Host * N/W No. 1 PLC No. 2 Type IP address Port No. Communication 5 AJ71E71 192.168.0.
PAGE 308
8.4.7 Connecting to Ethernet module (FX Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module (FX Series) in the following case of the system configuration. POINT  Ethernet parameter settings of FX Configurator-EN (1) Ethernet settings Set the Ethernet parameter with FX Configurator-EN. For using FX Configurator-EN, install GX Developer Ver. 8.25B or later on the personal computer. For details on FX Configurator-EN, refer to the following manual.
PAGE 309
1 (3) Open settings PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING (2) Operational settings Setting (with GOT connected) Protocol TCP Open system MELSOFT connection 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Fixed buffer Fixed buffer communication procedure Item Communication date code*1 IP address Setting (with GOT connected) Setting Existence confirmation (Use default value.) 192.168.0.19 Transmission target device Port No. (DEC.) (Use default value.
PAGE 310
 Ethernet parameter settings of FX3U-ENET- (2) Open settings ADP (1) Ethernet settings Set the Ethernet parameter at [FX Parameter] on GX Works2. To set FX3U-ENET-ADP, GX Works2 Ver.1.90U or later is required. For details on the setting of FX3U-ENET-ADP, refer to the following manual.
PAGE 311
Setting (Use default value.) GOT NET No. 1 GOT PLC No. 1 GOT IP Address 192.168.0.18 GOT Port No. (Communication) 5019 GOT Port No. (Ethernet Download) 5014 Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Retry 3times Startup Time 3sec Timeout Time 3sec Delay Time 0ms Ethernet setting No.1 Setting Host * N/W No. 1 PLC No. 2 Type FX (fixed) IP address Port No. Communication *1 *2 Windows. (a) When normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19 Reply from 192.168.0.
PAGE 312
8.4.8 Connecting to Display I/F (CNC C70) (2) CNC monitor This section describes the settings of the GOT and Display I/F (CNC C70) in the following case of the system configuration. POINT Display I/F (CNC C70) For details of the Display I/F (CNC C70), refer to the following manual. C70 Series SET UP MANUAL  System configuration ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 (The settings other than the following are set to the default) Network No. :1 PLC No. :1 IP address : 192.168.0.
PAGE 313
1 Ethernet setting No.1 Set value Host * N/W No. 1 PLC No. 2 Type 2 Q17nNC IP address 192.168.0.19 Port No. 5001 (fixed) Communication UDP (fixed) DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Item PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING (2) Ethernet setting POINT 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 8.3.
PAGE 314
8.4.9 Connecting to CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module This section describes the settings of the GOT, Ethernet adapter module and the PLC in the following system configuration.  System configuration  GX Works2 network parameter Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET For details of the setting contents of PLC side, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/ Local Module User's Manual (1) Network Type, Network No.
PAGE 315
[Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 8.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) (1) Controller setting Item Set value (Use default value) GOT PC No. 1 GOT IP Address Item 1*1 Network No. 1*2 Station No. *1 *2 Set value Set the same value as the network No. set on the PLC side. Set a value other than the network No. set on the PLC side. (2) Ethernet setting 192.168.3.
PAGE 316
8.4.10 Connecting to PERIPHERAL I/F (Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU)  System configuration Leave the Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU settings as default in the following system configuration. This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU in the following case of system configuration. ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 (The settings other than the following are set to the default) :1 Network No.
PAGE 317
1 GOT IP Address : As necessary : Not necessary (2) Open settings The setting is required for all the connected GOTs. 192.168.3.1 GOT Port No. (Communication) 5001 GOT Port No. (Ethernet Download) 5014 Default Gateway 2 0.0.0.0 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Retry 3times Startup Time 3 sec Timeout time 3 sec Delay Time 0ms 3 (4) Ethernet setting Item Set value Host Ethernet setting No.1 1*1 PC No. 2*2 Type IP address Protocol Open system Host station port No.
PAGE 318
POINT Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2/GX Developer Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2/GX Developer is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2/GX Developer, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual (Common) GX Developer Version8 Operating Manual 8 - 48 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.
PAGE 319
 When connecting to multiple GOTs When the CPU No. is set to "1", the device on the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored. (1) Setting PLC No. When the CPU No. is set to "0", the monitoring target differs depending on the GOT connection destination. Refer to the following. GOT connection destination Monitoring target QJ71E71 module PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) PERIPHERAL I/F Motion CPU area (CPU No.2) When the CPU No.
PAGE 320
 When setting IP address Do not use "0" and "255" at the end of an IP address. (Numbers of *.*.*.0 and *.*.*.255 are used by the system) The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with the above numbers. Consult with the administrator of the network before setting an IP address to the GOT and controller.  When monitoring to another network No. on the same line When the network No. of the GOT does not match with that of the PLC on the same Ethernet, the PLC cannot be monitored.
PAGE 321
9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 12 9.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 9 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 9.4 PLC Side Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 11 13 9.5 Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 322
9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.1 Connectable Model List POINT (1) Connectable network When using MELSECNET/H in NET/10 mode, refer to MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION. Connect the GOT to the following network systems as an ordinary station.
PAGE 323
Communication type Refer to Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU MELSECNET/H 9.2 MELSECNET/H 9.2 MELSECNET/H 9.
PAGE 324
Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to - - - - - - A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) A2SCPU A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU Q172CPU*1*2 Q173CPU*1*2 Q172CPUN*1 Q173CPUN*1 Q172HCPU Motion controller CPU (Q Series) Q173HCPU MELSECNET/H Q172DCPU 9.
PAGE 325
Model name Clock Communication type 9 Refer to A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU 10 A373UCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3N - MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) A171SCPU - A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU 11 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 WS0-CPU0 - - - - LJ72GF15-T2 - - CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF-ETB - - CNC C70 Q173NCCPU MELSECNET/H 9.2 Robot controller CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) MELSECNET/H 9.
PAGE 326
9.1.2 MELSECNET/H network module Model name CPU series Coaxial bus MELSEC-Q (Q mode)*1 MELSEC-QS Motion controller CPU (Q Series) CNC C70 Robot controller (CRnQ-700) QJ71LP21 QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11*1 C Controller module QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11*1 *1 9-6 Optical loop Use function version B or later of the MELSECNET/H network module and CPU. 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.
PAGE 327
9 Connecting to optical loop system GOT 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Communication driver Connection cable MELSECNET/H PLC Model name Connection cable MELSECNET/H network module Communication type QJ71LP21 QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25 MELSECNET/H QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25 MELSECNET/H *1 MELSEC-Q MELSEC-QS C Controller module GOT Cable model Max.
PAGE 328
*3 For the coaxial cable, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) For the coaxial cable connector connection method, refer to the following. *4 1.4.2 Coaxial cable connector connection method The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the total number of stations. For details, refer to the following manual.
PAGE 329
Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 9.3.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. 2. 11 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 3. Click! Network Type Description Set the network type. (Default: MNET/H mode) Range • MNET/H mode • MNET/10 mode • MNET/H Extended mode*1 4. Network No. Set the network No. (Default: 1) 1 to 239 Station No. Set the station No. of the GOT.
PAGE 330
Item Description Range Refresh Interval Set the number of refreshes to secure the send/receive data in station units during communication. (Default: 1time) Valid when [Secured data send/ Secured data receive] Is marked by the control station side network parameters of the melsecnet/h network system. 1 to 1000times Transmission Speed Set the communication transmission speed. (Default: 25Mbps) When specifying [MNET/10 mode] as The network type, only 10mbps can be set applicable.
PAGE 331
9 Set the station number setting switch and mode setting switch. QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71LP21-25 X1 23 78 90 1 90 1 11 (1) IN 01 EF 2 01 EF 2 3 45 MODE BCD 89 A EXT.PW EXT.PW (2) 89 A 67 34 5 MODE 67 System configuration (2) BCD (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Network type : MNET/H Mode Network No. :1 Station No.
PAGE 332
9.4.3 (1) Station number setting switch Station number setting switch 90 1 78 90 1 56 *1 23 4 X1 23 456 X10 78 STATION NO. Description Station number setting Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Parameter setting  Connecting to MELSEC-Q or QS series (1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer (a) Network parameter 1 (Station No.1)*1 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Do not set the same station No. as that of the GOT.
PAGE 333
(c) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s. 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) (b) Network range assignment MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 Send range for station (LB) Station No.1 Start 0000H End 00FFH Station No.
PAGE 334
 Connecting to C Controller module Item Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the MELSECNET/H utility. Operation settings (1) Connection settings Set value Network type MNET/H mode (Control station) Network No.*1 1 Group No.
PAGE 335
9 Item Set value Network Type MNET/H mode Network No. 1: Network No.1 Station No. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 10 2: Station No.2 Mode Setting Online (auto.
PAGE 336
9.5 Precautions  Network configuration Use MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network) to configure a network including the GOT. The following networks including the GOT cannot be configured. • MELSECNET/H (Remote I/O network)  Network type setting When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system, the following time is taken until when the PLC runs.
PAGE 337
MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 9 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 10.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 10.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7 10.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12 13 10.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 338
10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.1 Connectable Model List POINT (1) Connectable network The MELSECNET/10 connection includes the MELSECNET/H network system used in the MELSECNET/10 mode. The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I/O network. Connect the GOT to the following network systems as an ordinary station.
PAGE 339
Communication type Refer to Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU 10 Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU MELSECNET/10 10.2 Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU 11 Q100UDEHCPU Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU C Controller module Q12DCCPU-V*1 MELSEC-QS QS001CPU Q24DHCCPU-V 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Clock MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Model name MELSECNET/10 10.2 MELSECNET/10 10.
PAGE 340
Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU MELSECNET/10 10.2 A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU MELSEC-A (AnCPU) A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 - - A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU-S1 A2NCPUP21-S1 A2NCPUR21-S1 A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21 A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 MELSECNET/10 10.
PAGE 341
Communication type Refer to Q172CPU*1*2 Q173CPU*1*2 Q172CPUN*1 Q173CPUN*1 10 Q172HCPU Motion controller CPU (Q Series) Q173HCPU MELSECNET/10 Q172DCPU 10.2 Q173DCPU Q172DCPU-S1 Q173DCPU-S1 11 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU Q170MCPU*3 MR-MQ100 - - A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Clock MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Model name MELSECNET/10 10.
PAGE 342
Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to FX0 FX0S - FX0N FX1 FX2 - FX2C FX1S MELSEC-FX FX1N - - FX2N FX1NC FX2NC - FX3G FX3GC - FX3U FX3UC 10.1.
PAGE 343
10.2.1 Connecting to optical loop system Communication driver Communication driver MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 10.2 System Configuration (When MELSECNET/H communication unit is used) MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network module GOT PLC MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network module Communication type Cable model GOT Max.
PAGE 344
10.2.2 Connecting to the coaxial bus system Communication driver Communication driver MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10 (When MELSECNET/H communication unit is used) MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network module PLC (When MELSECNET/10 communication unit is used) GOT Connection cable PLC Model name MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network module Connection cable Communication type Cable model Max.
PAGE 345
10.3.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. 2. 3. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 4. Item Click! Description Range • MNET/H mode • MNET/10 mode • MNET/H Extended Set the network type. Network Type (Default: MNET/H mode) mode*1 3. 4. [Controller Setting] from the Network No. 1 to 239 Station No. Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 64 The Controller Setting window is displayed.
PAGE 346
Item Description Range Set the number of refreshes to secure the send/receive data in station units during communication. (Default: 1time) 1 to 1000times Valid when "Secured data send/ Secured data receive" is marked by the control station side network parameters of the MELSECNET/H network system. Refresh Interval Set the communication transmission speed. Transmission (Default: 25Mbps) 10Mbps/25Mbps Speed When specifying [MNET/10 mode] as the network type, only 10Mbps can be set applicable.
PAGE 347
9 0 1 2 3 Set the station No. of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit. Set to not duplicate other stations in the network. (Default: 01) 1 to 64: GT1575J71LP23-Z 1 to 32: GT1575J71BR13-Z 9 0 1 (4) Mode setting switch 89 CDE 23 67 AB MODE 45 Mode setting switch GT15 MELSECNET/10 communication unit User's Manual Description On-line (Default: 0) Set value F0 1 POINT POWER (1) Switch setting example For the switch setting example, refer to the following. D.LINK T.PASS DUAL SW.E M/S.E E PRM.
PAGE 348
10.4 PLC Side Setting Reference POINT MELSECNET/H network module QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25, QJ71BR11 10.4.1 MELSECNET/10 network module (QnA Series) AJ71QLP21, AJ71QLP21S, AJ71QBR11, A1SJ71QLP21, A1SJ71QLP21S, A1SJ71QBR11 10.4.2 MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series) AJ71LP21, AJ71BR11, A1SJ71LP21, A1SJ71BR1 10.4.3  Switch setting of MELSECNET/H network module QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25 MNG D.LINK RD L ERR. QJ71LP21 S-25 QJ71BR11 MNG D.LINK RD L ERR.
PAGE 349
Station number setting MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Set value MELSEC-Q or QS series) (1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer (a) Network parameter 10 1 *1 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) (Station No.1)*1 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Do not set the same station No. as that of the GOT.
PAGE 350
(b) Network range assignment Item Set value Monitoring time Setting necessity at GOT connection 200 Send range for station (LB) Station No.1 Start 0000H End 00FFH Station No.2 Start 0100H End 01FFH Send range for station (LW) Station No.1 Start 0000H End 00FFH Station No.2 Start 0100H End 01FFH LB/LW setting*1 (c) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times).
PAGE 351
Network No.*1 1 Group No. 0 Mode Online Return (Use default value) Refresh parameters 2 Mark the checkbox User name*2 target Password*2 password Detailed settings - : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary If the IP address of the C Controller module has been changed, input the changed IP address or host name. If the account of the C Controller module has been changed, input the changed user name and password. *1 *2 Send range for each station LB 192.168.3.3 (Default) Sta. No.
PAGE 352
(b) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.
PAGE 353
9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)  Switch setting of MELSECNET/10 network module Set for each setting switch. AJ71QLP21S A J71QLP21 10 100 In this section, the network parameter (common parameter) of GX Developer is taken as an example to provide explanations. E R R O R RUN PC REMOTE DUAL SW.E M/S.E PRM.E CRC OVER AB.IF TIME DATA UNDER LOOP SD RD - A J71QLP21S - POWER - MNG - S.MNG - D.LINK - T.PASS - CPUR/W - CRC - OVER - AB.IF - TIME - DATA - UNDER - LOOP - SD - RD F.
PAGE 354
(1) Network number setting switch Network number setting switch NETWORK NO. X100 Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection 78 4 5 6 90 1 23 4 5 6 9 0 1 78 X10 23 4 5 6 1 (Network No.1)*1 9 0 1 78 X1 Network No. setting 23 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. *1 (2) Group number setting switch Group number setting switch 4 5 6 GROUP.NO. 90 1 78 Description Group No.
PAGE 355
0 (fixed) 45 : Necessary : As necessary MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Mode setting (Online) Setting necessity at GOT connection (1) Network parameter 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Set value : Not necessary (6) Condition setting switches OFF ON SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description Set value SW1 Network type (PLC to PLC net-work (PC)) OFF (fixed) SW2 Station type (Control station (MNG)) ON (fixed) 11 12 Item Parameter SW3 for using*1 (common parameter (PRM))
PAGE 356
(2) Network range assignment (3) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s. Item Set value Monitoring time Send range for each station (LB) BW setting*1 Send range for each station (LW) Setting necessity at GOT connection 200 Station No.
PAGE 357
3times Timeout Time 3sec This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series) in the following case of system configuration. In this section, the network parameter (common parameter) of GX Developer is taken as an example to provide explanations. POINT [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 10.3.
PAGE 358
 Switch setting of MELSECNET/10 network (1) Network number setting switch module Set for each setting switch. AJ71BR11 AJ71LP21 AJ71BR11 - POWER - MNG - S.MNG - D.LINK - T.PASS - CPUR/W SW.E M/S.E PRM.E CRC OVER AB.IF TIME DATA UNDER - 100 E R R O R NETWORK NO. X100 1 78 78 4 5 6 SD RD - R.LOOP X10 23 NETWORK NO. X100 X1 78 (1) X10 X1 X1 STATION NO. X10 STATION NO. X10 (3) X1 MODE MODE (5) 0: ONLINE(A.R) 2: OFFLINE OFF ON OFF ON SW PC REMOTE 1 2 N.ST MNG 3 PRM D.
PAGE 359
0 (fixed) MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Mode setting (Online) Setting necessity at GOT connection (1) Network parameter 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Set value 23 45 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary (6) Condition setting switches SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description Set value SW1 Network type (PLC to PLC net-work (PC)) OFF (fixed) Station type (Control station (MNG)) ON (fixed) SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 *1 Item Parameter *1 for using (common p
PAGE 360
(2) Network range assignment (3) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s. Item Set value Monitoring time Send range for each station (LB) LB/LW setting *1 Send range for each station (LW) Setting necessity at GOT connection 200 Station No.
PAGE 361
9 Item MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)  [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Set value (Use default) Retry 3times Timeout Time 3sec 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) POINT [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 10.3.
PAGE 362
10.5 Precautions  Network configuration Use the MELSECNET/10 mode of MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network) or MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC network) to configure a network including the GOT. (1) The following networks including the GOT cannot be configured. • MELSECNET/10 (Remote I/O network) • MELSECNET/H (Remote I/O network) (2) When configuring the network (MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network) including the GOT, refer to the following. 9.
PAGE 363
MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 11 9 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 2 11.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 7 11.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 364
11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11.1 Connectable Model List 11.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the connectable models. Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to Q00JCPU Q00CPU*1 Q01CPU*1 Q02CPU*1 Q02HCPU*1 Q06HCPU*1 Q12HCPU*1 Q25HCPU CC-Link IE *1 *1 11.
PAGE 365
Refer to Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU CC-Link IE 11.2 Q06UDVCPU 10 Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU C Controller module MELSEC-QS Q12DCCPU-V*1 Q24DHCCPU-V QS001CPU CC-Link IE 11.2 CC-Link IE 11.
PAGE 366
Series Model name Clock Communicati on type Refer to - - - - - - - - A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) A2SCPU A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU Q172CPU Q173CPU Q172CPUN Q173CPUN Q172HCPU Q173HCPU Motion controller CPU (Q Series) Q172DCPU Q173DCPU Q172DCPU-S1 Q173DCPU-S1 CC-Link IE 11.
PAGE 367
Communication type Refer to A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3 10 A171SCPU A171SCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3N - MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Motion controller CPU (A Series) - A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU 11 A172SHCPUN CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 MELSEC-WS MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station CC-Link IE Field Network head module WS0-CPU0 - WS0-CPU1 QJ72LP25-25 QJ72LP25G - - 12 QJ72BR15 - - CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter
PAGE 368
11.1.2 CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit CPU series MELSEC-Q (Q mode) C Controller module MELSEC-QS Motion controller CPU (Q Series) CNC C70 Robot controller (CRnQ-700) *1 11 - 6 CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit*1 QJ71GP21-SX QJ71GP21S-SX When the CC-Link IE Controller Network is in the extended mode, use a unit with the upper five digits of the serial No. 12052 or later. 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11.
PAGE 369
9 11.2.1 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 11.
PAGE 370
11.3 GOT side settings 11.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 11.3.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. Set the channel of connecting equipment. 2. 3. 4. Item Network Type*4 Click! 1. 2. 3. 4. Select [Common] menu. Set the network Type (Default: CC IE Control) Set the following items. • Manufacturer: Mitsubishi • Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Type to be connected.
PAGE 371
*4 For details of routing parameters, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual (1) Switch setting example For the switch setting example, refer to the following. 12 Range Transfer Network No. 1 to 239 Relay Network No. 1 to 239 GT User’s Manual (3) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. (4) Network type Be sure to set the same network types for the CPU side and the GOT side.
PAGE 372
11.4 PLC Side Setting This section describes the settings of the GOT and CCLink IE controller network module in the following case of system configuration.  System configuration2 (Network Type: CC IE Control extended mode) (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) POINT CC-Link IE Controller Network module For details of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module, refer to the following manual.
PAGE 373
9 (b) Network range assignment MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)  Parameter settings (Connection to MELSECQ, QS series) of System configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Control) (1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer (a) Network parameter 2000 Station Start No.1 End 0000H 00FFH LB LB/LW setting(1) Station Start No.1 End *1 0100H 12 01FFH 00000H CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Station Start No.2 End 000FFH LW Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Starting I/O No.
PAGE 374
(c) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.  Parameter setting (when connecting to C Controller module) Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the CC IE Control utility.
PAGE 375
9 (b) Network range assignment MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) (2) CC IE Control Utility's [Parameter Settings] (a) Parameter settings Number of modules Link device refresh cycle Routing parameter Target module Set value 1 Station Start No.2 End settings (1) Station Start No.1 End Refer to (c) 1 Station Start No.2 End 0000H Channel No. 151 LX/LY settings*1 CC IE Control (Control station) Monitoring time 1 Group No. 0 Station No.
PAGE 376
(c) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.  GT Designer3 [Communication settings] of System configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Control) Item Network Type Network No. Set value CC IE Control 1: Network No.1 Station No. 2: Station No.
PAGE 377
(a) Network parameter POINT (1) Network type of the GOT side When the network is in the extended mode, be sure to set the network type of the GOT side to [CC IE Control extended mode]. For [Controller Setting], of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Item Setting necessity at GOT connection Set value Network Type CC IE Control Ext. Mode (Control station) (fixed) Start I/O No.*1 0000H Network No.*2 1 Total Stations 2 0 (Fixed) Station No.
PAGE 378
11.5 Precautions  GOT startup in CC-Link IE Controller Network connection For the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, the data link is started approximately 13 seconds after the GOT startup.  When a network error occurs in the system alarm In the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, when a network error occurs in the system alarm, the system alarm display cannot be canceled even though the causes are removed.  Connection to Q170MCPU Set [CPU No.
PAGE 379
MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 12 9 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 12.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 2 12.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 7 12.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 10 13 12.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 380
12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.1 Connectable Model List 12.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the connectable models.
PAGE 381
Refer to Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU Q03UDVCPU MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Q04UDVCPU 12.2 Q06UDVCPU 10 Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU C Controller module Q12DCCPU-V*1 MELSEC-QS QS001CPU*3 Q24DHCCPU-V CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK 12.2 12.2 L02CPU*2 L26CPU MELSEC-L L26CPU-BT*2 12.
PAGE 382
Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to - - - - - - - - CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK - A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) A2SCPU A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU Q172CPU Q173CPU Q172CPUN Q173CPUN Q172HCPU Motion controller CPU (Q Series) Q173HCPU Q172DCPU Q173DCPU Q172DCPU-S1 Q173DCPU-S1 Q17
PAGE 383
Model name Clock 9 Communication type Refer to A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU 10 A373UCPU-S3 A171SCPU A171SCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3N - MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Motion controller CPU (A Series) - A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN 11 A172SHCPU CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU1 - - - - 12 QJ72LP25-25 QJ72LP25G QJ72BR15 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK 12.
PAGE 384
12.1.2 CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit CPU series MELSEC-Q(Universal model) 12 - 6 CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit QJ71GF11-T2, QD77GF16 MELSEC-L LJ71GF11-T2 MELSEC-QS QS0J71GF11-T2 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.
PAGE 385
9 12.2.1 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 12.2 System Configuration Connecting to CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Communication driver CC-Link IE Field Network CC-Link IE Field Network unit PLC CPU GOT Connection cable Cable model*2 CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet cable that meets the 1000BASE-T standard: Category 5e or higher, (double-shielded, STP) straight cable.
PAGE 386
12.3 GOT side settings 12.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 12.3.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. Set the channel of connecting equipment. 2. 3. 4. Item Network Type*4 Click! 1. 2. 3. 4. Select [Common] menu. [Controller Setting] from the The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Set the following items.
PAGE 387
MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Item (1) Switch setting example For the switch setting example, refer to the following. 12.4 PLC Side Setting (2) Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual.
PAGE 388
12.4 PLC Side Setting This section describes the settings of the GOT and CCLink IE controller network module in the following case of system configuration. POINT  Parameter settings (Connection to MELSECQ, QS series) of System configuration (Network Type: CC IE Field) (1) Network parameter] of GX Works2 Use GX Works2 of Version 1.31H or later. (a) Network parameter CC-Link IE Field Network Module For details of the CC-Link IE Field Network module, refer to the following manual.
PAGE 389
(c) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s. 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) (b) Network Configuration Settings MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 Station No.1 Start 0000H End 00FFH RWw/RWr setting Station No.
PAGE 390
 GT Designer3 [Communication settings] of System configuration (Network Type: CC IE Field) Item Network Type Network No. Set value CC IE Field 1: Network No.1 Station No. 1: Station No.
PAGE 391
For the CC-Link IE Field Network connection, the data link is started approximately 15 seconds after the GOT startup.  When a network error occurs in the system alarm In the CC-Link IE Field Network connection, when a network error occurs in the system alarm, the system alarm display cannot be canceled even though the causes are removed. To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT.
PAGE 392
12 - 14 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.
PAGE 393
MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 13 9 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 13.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 2 13.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 6 13.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 12 13 13.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 394
13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.1 Connectable Model List 13.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the connectable models. Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to Q00JCPU Q00CPU*1 Q01CPU*1 Q02CPU*1 Q02HCPU*1 Q06HCPU*1 Q12HCPU*1 Q25HCPU*1 Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU (Main base) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) Q25PRHCPU (Extension base) Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU CC-Link(ID) 13.
PAGE 395
Communicati on type Refer to - - L02CPU L26CPU MELSEC-L L26CPU-B L02CPU-P CC-Link(ID) 13.2.2 10 L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU MELSEC-Q (A mode) Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1 CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1 CC-Link(ID) 13.2.
PAGE 396
Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 - - A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU Q172CPU*1*2 Q173CPU*1*2 Q172CPUN*1 Q173CPUN*1 Q172HCPU Motion controller CPU (Q Series) Q173HCPU CC-Link(ID) Q172DCPU 13.
PAGE 397
MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station Clock Communication type Refer to WS0-CPU0 - WS0-CPU1 QJ72LP25-25 - - LJ72GF15-T2 - - CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF-ETB - - CNC C70 Q173NCCPU CC-Link(ID) 13.2 Robot controller CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) CC-Link(ID) 13.
PAGE 398
13.2 System Configuration 13.2.1 Connecting with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible Communication driver Communication driver CC-Link Ver2(ID) CC-Link(ID) (When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link communication unit is used) CC-Link module PLC (When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used) GOT Connection cable PLC Model name Connection cable CC-Link module *1 Communication type QJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N CC-Link (Ver.1) C Controller module QJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N CC-Link(Ver.
PAGE 399
9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Connecting with CC-Link Ver.2 compatible Communication driver 10 CC-Link Ver2(ID) (When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link communication unit is used) PLC *1 Communication type Cable model Max. distance Option device Model Number of connectable equipment QJ61BT11N MELSEC-L LJ61BT11 MELSEC-L (L26CPU-BT) - CC-Link (Ver.
PAGE 400
13.2.3 Connecting with CC-Link Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed Communication driver Communication driver CC-Link Ver2(ID) CC-Link(ID) (When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link communication unit is used) CC-Link module QCPU (When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used) GOT Connection cable PLC Model name Connection cable CC-Link module *1 Communication type CC-Link (Ver.2) Cable model CC-Link dedicated cable GOT Max.
PAGE 401
9 POINT The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Set the channel of the connected equipment. 1.1.2 I/F communication setting 2. 13.3.2 Communication detail settings 3. Make the settings according to the usage environment. 4. (1) CC-Link Ver.2 (ID) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 11 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 13.3.
PAGE 402
*1 Transmission speed settings The following lists the transmission speed settings of the CCLink communication. Set value (2) CC-Link(ID) Description 0 Online: 156kbps 1 Online: 625kbps 2 Online: 2.5Mbps 3 Online: 5Mbps 4 Online: 10Mbps A Hardware test: 156kbps B Hardware test: 625kbps C Hardware test: 2.5Mbps D Hardware test: 5Mbps E Hardware test: 10Mbps For details of the hardware test, refer to the following manual.
PAGE 403
Description POINT For details of each setting switch and LED, refer to the following manual. 0: 156kbps 1: 625kbps 2: 2.5Mbps 3: 5Mbps 4: 10Mbps (4) Condition setting switches Condition setting switches GT15 CC-Link communication unit User's Manual GT15-75J61BT13-Z Front side Left side Set value Setting switch Description Set value SW1 Specify input data status of the data link error station. (Default: OFF) OFF: Cleared ON: Held SW2 Specify the number of stations occupied.
PAGE 404
13.4 PLC Side Setting The GOT operates as the stations of which are shown below in the CC-Link system. Station data HINT Description Station type Intelligent device station, Ver.1 intelligent device station or Ver.2 intelligent device station Number of stations occupied Station 1 or Station 4 The switch settings and parameter settings of the PLC side (CC-Link module) are described in 13.4.1 to 13.4.7. Model name CC-Link module (Q Series) Refer to Connecting with Ver.
PAGE 405
Set the station number setting switch, transmission speed / mode setting switch. QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11N MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 0 11 (2) 0 8 C MODE CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 4  System configuration NC 1 NC ■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 ■ Setting of the CC-Link communication unit Station type DA 2 DB 4 3 SLD (Use the default value for settings other than the following.
PAGE 406
 Parameter setting (when connecting to MELSEC-Q or QS series) (b) Station information setting (1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer (a) Network parameter Item*1 Set value Intelligent device station (fixed) Station type Exclusive station count*2 Exclusive station 1 Reserve/invalid station select No setting Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value) : Necessary *1 *2 Item Set value No. of boards in module Setting necessity at GOT connection 1 Start I/O No.
PAGE 407
9 (2) CC-Link Utility's [Parameter Settings] MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)  Parameter setting (when connecting to C (a) Parameter settings Controller module) Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the CCLink utility. (1) Connection settings MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 Mark the checkbox Number of modules 1 Target module 1 target Password*2 password Start I/O No. 0000H - Channel No.
PAGE 408
 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 (1) When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link communication unit is used Item Set value Station No. 1: Station No.1 Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.
PAGE 409
Set the station number setting switch, transmission speed / mode setting switch. 9  Parameter setting (when connecting to MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)  Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q Series) MELSEC-Q or QS series) (1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer (a) Network parameter QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11N L RUN S MST RD L ERR.
PAGE 410
(b) Station information setting  Parameter setting (when connecting to C Controller module) Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the CCLink utility. (1) Connection settings Item*1 Set value Ver.
PAGE 411
 [Communication settings] of GT Designer3 Item Station No. Transmission Rate Mode Number of stations occupied Item Number of modules 1 Target module 1 Channel No. (Use default value) Type Master station Mode Remote net (Ver.2 mode) 0ms (Use default value) 12 13.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13 Clear Refresh Other settings (Use default value) 14 Sta. No.1 Ver.2 intelligent device station Sta. No.
PAGE 412
13.4.3 Connecting to CC-Link module (Q Series) with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed  Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q Series) Set the station number setting switch, transmission speed / mode setting switch. QJ61BT11N This section describes the setting of the GOT and CC-Link module (Q Series) with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed in the following system configuration. QJ61BT11N RUN MST SD ERR. POINT L RUN S MST RD L ERR.
PAGE 413
9 (b) Station information setting MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)  Parameter setting (when connecting to MELSEC-Q or QS series) (1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer (a) Network parameter • Station information setting of station No.1 (GOT) Ver.
PAGE 414
 Parameter setting (when connecting to C (2) CC-Link Utility's [Parameter Settings] (a) Parameter settings Controller module) Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the CCLink utility. (1) Connection settings Target module*1 Write authority *2 *2 Password Detailed settings *2 Setting necessity at GOT connection *1 Set value Item 192.168.3.3 (Default) Mark the checkbox target User name *1 Set value Number of modules 1 Target module 1 password Start I/O No. 0000H - Channel No.
PAGE 415
Sta. No.2 No setting 2: Station No.2 Transmission Rate Mode 0: Online 156kbps Ver.2: Remote net (Ver.2 mode) Expanded Cyclic (Use default value) Single Number of stations occupied 1 Station Input for Error Station 0: Clear Retry : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set. [Remote station points] is a setting for the remote I/O station.
PAGE 416
13.4.4 Connecting to MELSEC-L series with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible  [Network parameter] of GX Developer (1) Network parameter This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSEC-L in the following case of the system configuration. POINT (1) CC-Link module (L Series) For details of the CC-Link module (L Series), refer to the following manual.
PAGE 417
This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSEC-L in the following case of the system configuration. Intelligent device station (fixed) Station type Exclusive station count*2 No setting Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value) : Necessary *1 MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (2) CC-Link function built-in CPU For details on the CC-Link function built-in CPU, refer to the following manual.
PAGE 418
 [Network parameter] of GX Developer (2) Station information setting (1) Network parameter Item*1 Set value Ver.2 intelligent device station (fixed) Station type Expanded cyclic setting*2 *2 Single Exclusive station count Exclusive station 1 Remote station points 32 points (fixed) Reserve/invalid station select No setting Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value) : Necessary *1 Item Set value No.
PAGE 419
Set for each setting switch. A1SJ61QBT11 AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 (2) 456 B RATE 2 3 4 CLR HLD 3 45 (4) 11 8 1 625K 2 2. 5M 4 10M NC ON S MST CLEAR HOLD 1/2 1/4 3/4 2/3 ON SW 1 2 3 4 1 5 6 7 8 (4) NC 2 NC 4 NC 6 NC 8 3 DB 5 DG 1 NC 2 NC 4 NC 6 9 3 DB (FG) 10 5 DG 12 7 SLD NC DA CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION *1 (Use the default value for settings other than the following.
PAGE 420
 Parameter setting (3) Transmission speed setting switch Transmission speed setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection 901 456 78 23 Transmission speed B RATE 1 625K Performing it from the [Network parameter] of the GX Developer can be set only when the PLC CPU and the CC-Link module use the function version B or later.
PAGE 421
The parameter is written to the buffer memory, and the data link is automatically started when PLC CPU status changes from STOP to RUN. (a) I/O signal of CC-Link module (b) Device used by user Flag for data link startup Exclusive station 1 Number of connected modules D1 Number of retry D2 Automatic reconnection station count D3 Operation specification in the case of CPU failure 11 Reserve/invalid station select No setting D4 Reserved station specification (Station No. 1 to Station No.
PAGE 422
(d) Example of sequence program Parameter setting Module error Module ready Number of connected modules (1 module) Number of retry (3 times) Number of automatic return stations (1 station) Operation specification in the case of CPU failure (Stop) Reserved station specification (No specification) Error invalid station specification (No specification) Station data (Intelligent device station, exclusive station 1, station No.
PAGE 423
1: Station No.1 Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode) Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value) Number of stations occupied 1 Station Input for Error Station 0: Clear Retry Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value) Delay Time 0ms (Use default value) (2) When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used Item 10 POINT CC-Link module (A Series) For details of the CC-Link module (A Series), refer to the following manual.
PAGE 424
 Settings of CC-Link module (A Series) (3) Transmission speed setting switch Set for each setting switch. T E S T SD RD STATION NO. SD RD MODE 4 5 0 5 5 8 4 78 3 5M 4 10M B RATE 1 625K 2 2. 5M SW OFF ON 1 M / L S. M 3 5M 2 3 4 CLR HLD 5 1/2 3/4 6 1/4 2/3 (4) 2 2.
PAGE 425
9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)  Sequence program The parameter setting and the sequence program of the data link startup request is required. (1) Programming condition (with CC-Link dedicated instructions) The program sets the network parameter and automatic refresh parameter when PLC CPU status changes from STOP to RUN, and automatically starts the data link with CC-Link dedicated instructions.
PAGE 426
(c) Example of sequence program (CC-Link dedicated instruction) * Setting of network parameter with dedicated RLPA instruction Module error Module ready Synchronous mode (Invalid) Number of connected modules (1 module) Station data (intelligent device station, exclusive station 1, station No.1) Send buffer size (64 words) Receive buffer size (64 words) Automatic update buffer size (128 words) Dedicated instruction (RLPA) CC-Link module head I/O No.
PAGE 427
RY head number (RY0) RY refresh destination (Y) RY refresh destination device head No. (400) No. of refresh points (32) RW head No. (RW0) RW refresh destination (D) RW refresh destination device head No. (200) No. of refresh points (260) SB head No. (SB0) SB refresh destination (B) SB refresh destination device head number (0) No. of refresh points (512) SW head number (SW0) SW refresh destination (W) SW refresh destination device head No. (0) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) No.
PAGE 428
(2) Program condition (for FROM/TO instruction) This program writes parameters to the buffer memory when PLC CPU status changes from STOP to RUN and automatically starts the data link with FROM/TO instruction.
PAGE 429
9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) (d) Example of sequence program (FROM/TO instruction) Number of connected modules (1 module) Number of retry (3 times) Number of automatic return stations (1 station) Operation specification in the case of CPU failure (Stop) Reserved station specification (No specification) Error invalid station specification (No specification) Station data (Intelligent device station, exclusive station 1, station No.
PAGE 430
 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 (1) When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link communication unit is used Item Set value Station No. 1: Station No.1 Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.
PAGE 431
(2) Access range that can be monitored The monitoring range of remote I/O (RX and RY) and that of the remote registers (RWr and RWw) vary according to the mode in the master station of the CCLink system. Applicable of monitoring Mode of master station Data for each station compatible with CC-Link ver.1 Data for each station compatible with CC-Link ver.2 Remote net mode - Remote net ver.1 mode - Remote net ver.
PAGE 432
 Connection to Q170MCPU Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2). When the CPU No. is set to "0" or "1", the device on the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored. When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0" to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring cannot be executed. For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version Manual Screen Design Example) Setting dialog box of the bit device 13 - 40 13.
PAGE 433
CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 6 14.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 8 14.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 9 14.5 PLC Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 - 11 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 14.6 Precautions . .
PAGE 434
14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.1 Connectable Model List 14.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the connectable models.
PAGE 435
C Controller module Q12DCCPU-V*2 MELSEC-QS QS001CPU Q24DHCCPU-V Clock Refer to *1 CC-Link(G4) *1 *1 - 14.2.1 - L02CPU L26CPU-BT *1 CC-Link(G4) L02CPU-P *1 *1 14.2.
PAGE 436
Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to - - - - - - A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) A2SCPU A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU Q172CPU*1*2 Q173CPU*1*2 Q172CPUN*1 Q173CPUN*1 Q172HCPU Motion controller CPU (Q Series) Q173HCPU CC-Link (G4) Q172DCPU *4 *4 *4 14.2.
PAGE 437
Clock Communication type Refer to A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3 10 A171SCPU A171SCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3N - MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Motion controller CPU (A Series) - A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN 11 A173UHCPU WS0-CPU0 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION A173UHCPU-S1 MELSEC-WS - - - - LJ72GF15-T2 - - CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF-ETB - - CNC C70 Q173NCCPU CC-Link (G4) *1 14.2.
PAGE 438
14.2 System Configuration 14.2.1 Connecting to QCPU (Q mode) Communication driver CC-Link (G4) QCPU Peripheral connection module CC-Link module Connection cable 2) Connection cable 1) PLC Model name Connection cable 1) CC-Link module Max.
PAGE 439
9 Connection cable 2) Communication driver CC-Link (G4) CC-Link module Cable model *1 Max. dista nce Model name Commu nication type Connection cable 2) Cable model Connection diagram number GT09-C30R2-9P or AJ65BT -R2N RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 2) LJ61BT11 CC-Link dedicated cable Max.
PAGE 440
14.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC. 14.3.
PAGE 441
Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 14.4.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. 2. 2. 3. 4. Select [Common] menu. [Controller Setting] from the The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: Mitsubishi • Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Type to be connected.
PAGE 442
HINT Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal device, GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller. For example, faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system. Disconnect the faulty station For details of the setting contents of GOT internal device, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 14 - 10 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.
PAGE 443
9 14.5.2 Connecting AJ65BT-G4-S3 This section describes the settings of the GOT and peripheral connection module in the following case of the system configuration. module Set the station number setting switch, data link transmission speed setting switch, and operation setting DIP switch. (2) MITSUBISHI (1) B RATE STATION NO. x 10 x1 AJ65BT-G4-S3 0 1 90 1 01 2 8 2 2 3 7 3 3 4 654 654 PW RUN L RUN SD RD L ERR.
PAGE 444
14.5.2 (3) Operation setting DIP switch Operation setting DIP switch SW 12345678 ON Setting Switch Description SW1, SW6 Operation mode SW2 Peripheral transmissi SW3 on speed*1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection SW1 = OFF SW6 = ON (fixed) (Q mode) OFF (fixed) SW4 SW5 Not used OFF (fixed) SW7 SW8 *1 Test mode OFF (fixed) (Online mode) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary The peripheral connection module operates with the baud rate set in the GOT.
PAGE 445
RS-232 transmission setting switch Setting switch Set value Description Setting necessity at GOT connection SW1 (2) 2 (1) SW2 SW3 Peripheral transmission speed *1 10 OFF (fixed) MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) (3) SW4 SW5 SW6 4 (4) SW7 SW8 (1) Station number setting switch Station number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection *1 Data bit length OFF (fixed) Parity bit length OFF (fixed) Stop bit length OFF (fixed) 11 : Necessary : As
PAGE 446
14.5.3 Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q series) Set the station number setting switch, transmission speed / mode setting switch. 14.5.4 [Network parameter] of GX Developer (1) Network parameter QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11N RUN MST SD ERR. L RUN S MST RD L ERR. 0 X10 5 STATION NO. 0 5 (1) X1 (2) 0 8 C MODE 4 NC 1 NC DA 2 DB 4 3 SLD 5 (FG) DG 6 7 Item Set value No. of boards in module (1) Station number setting switch 1 Start I/O No.
PAGE 447
Parameter setting (when connecting to C Controller module) Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the C Controller module setting utility. 10 Intelligent device station (fixed) Reserve/invalid station select No setting Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value) Item : Necessary *2 11 Exclusive station 1 (fixed) : As necessary Set value : Not necessary When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set.
PAGE 448
14.5.6 (2) [Parameter Setting] of CC-Link utility (a) Network parameter [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Item Set value Transmission Speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps Retry Count 0 to 5times Timeout Time 3 to 30sec Delay Time 0 to 300ms POINT Item Set value Number of modules 1 Target module 1 Start I/O No. 0000H Channel No. (Use default value) type Master station(fixed) Mode*1 Remote net (Ver.
PAGE 449
 Connection to Q170MCPU When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system, the following time is taken until when the PLC runs. Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2). QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10 seconds or more When the CPU No. is set to "0" or "1", the device on the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored. MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more When the CPU No.
PAGE 450
14 - 18 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.
PAGE 451
MITSUBISHI FA DEVICE CONNECTIONS 15. INVERTER CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 1 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 1 17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 1 18. CNC CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 452
PAGE 453
MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 15 9 INVERTER CONNECTION 15. 15.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 21 15.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 29 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 31 15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 44 15.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 454
15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to FREQROL-A500/A500L FREQROL-F500/F500L RS-422 15.2.1 RS-422 15.2.2 RS-422 15.2.3 RS-422 15.2.4 RS-422 15.2.5 FREQROL-V500/V500L FREQROL-E500 FREQROL-S500/S500E FREQROL-F500J FREQROL FREQROL-D700 FREQROL-F700PJ FREQROL-E700 FREQROL-A700 FREQROL-F700 FREQROL-F700P MELIPM 15 - 2 MD-CX522- K(-A0) 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.
PAGE 455
9 15.2.1 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 15.2 System Configuration Connecting to FREQROL-A500/A500L/F500/F500L/V500/V500L  When connecting to one inverter Computer link option Inverter GOT MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 Communication driver Connection cable FREQROL 500/700 Model name Connection cable Computer link option Communi cation type Connection diagram number GOT Max. distance Option device Number of connectable equipment Model 12 GT16-C02R4-9S (0.
PAGE 456
 When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the distributor) Communication driver Inverter Inverter FREQROL 500/700 Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Distributor Distributor Terminal cable Connection cable 1) Inverter Model name GOT Commun ication type Terminal cable Connection cable 1) Distributor Connection diagram number Model name *3 Connection cable 2) Connection cable 2) Connection diagram number GOT Option device Model Max.
PAGE 457
SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION INVERTER CONNECTION CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Hardware version Number of connectable Inverter GT1045-QSBD GT1040-QBBD A or later 31 GT1030-L D B or later 31 GT1030-H D A or earlier 10 E or later 31 GT1020-L D D or earlier 10 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.
PAGE 458
 When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the computer link option) Communication driver FREQROL 500/700 Computer link option Inverter Computer link option Inverter GOT Connection cable Inverter Model name Connection cable Computer link option Communi cation type GOT Connection diagram number Option device Model Max. distance Number of connectable equipment GT16-C02R4-9S(0.
PAGE 459
9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Connecting to FREQROL-E500/S500/S500E/F500J/D700/F700PJ  When connecting to one inverter GOT 10 Communication driver MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Inverter Connection cable FREQROL 500/700 Inverter Model name Connection cable Communi cation type Connection diagram number 11 GOT Max. distance Option device Model Number of connectable equipment GT16-C02R4-9S(0.
PAGE 460
 When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the distributor) Communication driver Inverter Inverter FREQROL 500/700 Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Distributor Distributor Connection cable 1) Terminal cable Inverter Model name GOT Commu nication type Terminal cable Connection cable 1) Distributor Connection diagram number Model name *3 Connection cable 2) Connection cable 2) Connection diagram number GOT Option device Model Max.
PAGE 461
SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION INVERTER CONNECTION CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Hardware version Number of connectable Inverter GT1045-QSBD GT1040-QBBD A or later 31 GT1030-L D B or later 31 GT1030-H D A or earlier 10 E or later 31 GT1020-L D D or earlier 10 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.
PAGE 462
15.2.3 Connecting to FREQROL E700  When connecting to one inverter Control terminal option Inverter GOT Communication driver Connection cable FREQROL 500/700 Inverter Model name Connection cable Control terminal option Commun ication type Connection diagram number GOT Max. distance Option device Number of connectable equipment Model GT16-C02R4-9S (0.
PAGE 463
Communication driver Inverter Inverter FREQROL 500/700 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9  When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the distributor) Distributor Distributor Inverter Model name Commun ication type Terminating cable Connection cable 1) Distributor Connection diagram number Model name *3 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Connection cable 2) Connection diagram number GOT Option device Model Max.
PAGE 464
15 - 12 Model name Hardware version Number of connectable Inverter GT1045-QSBD GT1040-QBBD A or later 31 GT1030-L D B or later 31 GT1030-H D A or earlier 10 E or later 31 GT1020-L D D or earlier 10 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.
PAGE 465
Communication driver FREQROL 500/700 Inverter MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Inverter 10 Control terminal option GOT 11 Connection cable Inverter Model name Connection cable Control terminal option Communi cation type GOT Connection diagram number Option device Model Max. distance Number of connectable equipment CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Control terminal option MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9  When connecting to multiple inverters (Max.
PAGE 466
15.2.4 Connecting to FREQROL-A700/F700/700P  When connecting to one inverter Inverter GOT Communication driver Connection cable FREQROL 500/700 Inverter Model name Connection cable Communi cation type Connection diagram number GOT Max. distance Option device Number of connectable equipment Model GT16-C02R4-9S(0.
PAGE 467
Communication driver FREQROL 500/700 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9  When connecting to multiple inverters (Max.
PAGE 468
Model name Hardware version Number of connectable Inverter GT1055-QSBD GT1050-QBBD C or later 31 B or earlier 10 GT1045-QSBD GT1040-QBBD A or later 31 GT1030-L D B or later 31 GT1030-H D A or earlier 10 E or later 31 D or earlier 10 GT1020-L 15 - 16 D 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.
PAGE 469
Inverter Communication driver GOT FREQROL 500/700 Connection cable MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Inverter 9 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)  When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the built-in RS485 terminal block) Model name Connection cable Communi cation type Connection diagram number GOT Option device Max. distance Model Number of connectable equipment GT16-C02R4-9S(0.
PAGE 470
15.2.5 Connecting to MD-CX522- K(-A0)  When connecting to one inverter Inverter GOT Communication driver Connection cable FREQROL 500/700 Inverter Connection cable Communication type Model name Connection diagram number GOT Max. distance Option device Number of connectable Model name equipment Model GT16-C02R4-9S(0.
PAGE 471
Communication driver Inverter Inverter FREQROL 500/700 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9  When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the distributor) Distributor Distributor Inverter Model name Commu nication type Terminating cable Connection cable 1) Distributor Connection diagram number Model name *3 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Connection cable 2) Connection diagram number GOT Option device Model Max.
PAGE 472
15 - 20 Model name Hardware version Number of connectable Inverter GT1045-QSBD GT1040-QBBD A or later 31 GT1030-L D B or later 31 GT1030-H D A or earlier 10 E or later 31 GT1020-L D D or earlier 10 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.
PAGE 473
Distributor side (Modular connector)  Connection diagram RS422 connection diagram 1) (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 ) Inverter or Distributor side (Modular connector) GOT side*1 RDA 2 5 SDA RDB 7 4 SDB SDA 1 3 RDA SDB 6 6 RDB RSA 3 2 P5S RSB 8 8 P5S CSA 4 - - CSB 9 - - SG 5 1 SG FG - *1 Inverter side or distributor side (Modular connector) SDA 5 5 SDA SDB 4 4 SDB RDA 3 3 RDA RDB 6 6 RDB P5S 2 2 P5S P5S 8 8 P5S SG 1 1
PAGE 474
RS422 connection diagram 4) (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 1 SDB 6 RDA 2 RDB 7 SG 5 RSA 3 RSB 8 CSA 4 CSB 9 FG - ) FR-A5NR side (terminal block) Station No.0 GOT side*2 SDA , GT104 FR-A5NR side (terminal block) Station No.1 RDA RDA RDB RDB SDA SDA SDB SDB SG SG RDR RDR FR-A5NR side (terminal block) Station No.
PAGE 475
9 ) *2 Built-in RS-485 terminal block Station No.1 Built-in RS-485 terminal block*1 Station No.n SG 5 GND SDA2 SDA1 SDB 6 RDB1 SDB2 SDB1 SDA 1 RDA1 RDA2 RDA1 RDB 7 SDB1 RDB2 RDB1 RDA 2 SDA1 GND GND RSA 3 SDA2 SDA1 SDA2 RSB 8 SDB2 SDB1 SDB2 CSA 4 RDA2 RDA1 RDA2 CSB 9 RDB2 RDB1 RDB2 - GND GND GND *1 *2 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) GOT side , GT104 Built-in RS-485 terminal block Station No.
PAGE 476
RS422 connection diagram 8) (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 ) FR-E7TR side terminal block Station No.0 GOT side*2 FR-E7TR side terminal block Station No.1 FR-E7TR side terminal block*1 Station No.
PAGE 477
9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) RS422 connection diagram 12) (For GT1030, GT1020) SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA FR-A5NR side (terminal block) Station No.1 FR-A5NR side (terminal block) Station No.n RDA RDA RDA RDB RDB RDB SDA SDA SDA SDB SDB SDB SG SG SG RDR RDR 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) FR-A5NR side (terminal block) Station No.
PAGE 478
RS422 connection diagram 14) (For GT1030, GT1020) Built-in RS-485 terminal block Station No.0 GOT side (terminal block) Built-in RS-485 terminal block Station No.1 Built-in RS-485 terminal block*1 Station No.
PAGE 479
9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) RS422 connection diagram 16) (For GT1030, GT1020) FR-E7TR side terminal block*1 Station No.
PAGE 480
 Precautions when preparing a cable (1) Cable length (4) Terminal block layout in the FR-A5NR computer link option Attach this option to the A500 and F500 Series. The length of the RS-422 cable must be 500m or less. (2) GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. 1.4.
PAGE 481
Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 15.4.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. 2. 2. 3. 4. [Controller Setting] from the The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: Mitsubishi • Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Type to be connected.
PAGE 482
HINT Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal device, GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller. For example, faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system. For details of the setting contents of GOT internal device, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 15 - 30 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.
PAGE 483
9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings For details of the inverter, refer to the manual of each series. Connecting FREQROL-S500, S500E, F500J series 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)  Communication settings Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.
PAGE 484
15.5.2 Connecting FREQROL-E500 series  Communication settings Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.146, Pr.342 (2) Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit).
PAGE 485
9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Connecting FREQROL-F500, F500L series  Communication settings Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters Pr.79, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.340 to Pr.342 (2) Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Set Pr.
PAGE 486
15.5.4 Connecting FREQROL-A500, A500L series  Communication settings Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.342 FR-A5NR (Option unit) Pr.79, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.340 to Pr.
PAGE 487
9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Connecting FREQROL-V500, V500L series  Communication settings Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters Pr.79, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.340 to Pr.342 (2) Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Set Pr.
PAGE 488
15.5.6 Connecting FREQROL-E700 series  Communication settings Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector FR-E7TR (RS-485 terminal block) Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.340, Pr.342, Pr.549 (2) Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit).
PAGE 489
9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Connecting FREQROL-D700 series  Communication settings Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters (2) Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Set Pr.
PAGE 490
15.5.8 Connecting FREQROL-F700/700P series  Communication settings Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.340, Pr.342 RS-485 terminal Pr.79, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.340 to Pr.342, Pr.
PAGE 491
HINT Automatic setting with Pr.999 (FREQROL-F700P series only) Parameter No. Operation in parameter setting mode GOT Initial settings (PU connector) [AUTO]→[GOT]→[1]Write 11 GOTInitial settings (RS-485 terminal) - When monitoring the value of Pr.999, 9999 is always monitored.
PAGE 492
15.5.9 Connecting FREQROL-F700PJ series  Communication settings Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.340, Pr.342, Pr.549 (2) Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Set Pr.
PAGE 493
9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 15.5.10 Connecting FREQROL-A700 series  Communication settings Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled. Parameter No.
PAGE 494
HINT (1) Automatic setting with Pr.999 If Pr.999 is set as the following, the communication settings other than [PU communication station number] and [Communication EEPROM write selection] can be automatically set in a batch to the default communication settings of the GOT side. Parameter No. Pr.999*1 *1 Set value Description 10 GOT Initial settings (PU connector) 11 GOT Initial settings (RS-485) Operation in parameter setting mode [AUTO] [GOT] [1]Write ― When monitoring the value of Pr.
PAGE 495
9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 15.5.12 Station number setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps. The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order. There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive. Station No.0 Station No.1 Station No.21 10 Station No.6 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Station No.
PAGE 496
15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set  Inverter (FREQROL 500/700 series) Device name Bit device The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows. Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3. The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models, even though belonging to the same series. Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used.
PAGE 497
An example with FREQROL-A700 series is shown below. For the setting items of other than the FREQROL-A700 series, refer to the following manual.
PAGE 498
(6) Special parameter POINT (1) Monitoring Pr.37 GOT cannot monitor the parameter (Pr.37) of FREQROL-E500/S500(E)/F500J/D700/F700PJ/ E700. (2) When setting "8888" or "9999" to inverter parameter (Pr) "8888" and "9999" designate special function. To set these numbers from GOT, designate a number as shown below.
PAGE 499
9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 15.7 Precautions  Station No. of inverter system Make sure to establish inverter system with No.0 station.  Number of inverter 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Up to 31 inverters can be connected. For GT11 and GT10, refer to the following manual for the procedure to check the connectable inverter depending on the version.
PAGE 500
15 - 48 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.
PAGE 501
SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 16. 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 16 9 16.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 3 16.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 8 16.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 12 16.5 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 502
16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Series Model name MELSERVO-J2-Super MELSERVO-J2M MELSERVO-J3 MELSERVO-J4*1 MR-J2S- A MR-J2S- CP MR-J2S- CL MR-J2M-P8A MR-J2MMR-J3- A MR-J3- T MR-J4- A *1 16 - 2 DU Clock Communication type Refer to RS-232 RS-422 16.2.1 RS-232 RS-422 16.2.2 RS-232 RS-422 16.2.3 RS-232 RS-422 For the RS-422 communication, use MELSERVO-J4 of software version A3 or a later version. 16.
PAGE 503
9 Communication driver GOT MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M Connection cable CHARGE Servo amplifier Connection cable Commun ication type Series name GOT Cable model Connection diagram number Max.
PAGE 504
16.2.2 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2M Series  When connecting via RS-232 communication Communication driver Servo amplifier GOT MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M Connection cable Servo amplifier Series name Connection cable Commun ication type GOT Cable model Connection diagram number Max.
PAGE 505
RS-422/232 converter MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M GOT Connection cable Series name Connection cable RS-422/232 interface converter RS-422/232 conversion cable Commun ication type Cable model Connection diagram number GOT Max. distance Option device Model Number of connectable equipment GT15-RS2-9P DSV-CABV(1.5m)*2 or FA-T-RS40VS - 15m - (Built into GOT) RS-232 12 *3 RS232 connection diagram 2) 15m MELSERVO- - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 servo amplifier GT16-C02R4-9S (0.
PAGE 506
 When connecting to multiple servo amplifiers (RS-422 connection) Communication driver MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M Servo amplifier Servo amplifier Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Distributor Distributor Terminal cable Connection cable 2) Servo amplifier Series name Commu nication type Terminating cable Connection cable 1) Connection diagram number Connection diagram number Distributor *2 Model name Connection cable 2) Connection diagram number GOT Connection cable 3) Distributor *2
PAGE 507
Communication driver MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9  When connecting to multiple servo amplifiers (RS-232 connection) 10 Servo amplifier Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Distributor Distributor 11 RS-422/232 converter Connection cable 2) CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Terminal cable MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Servo amplifier GOT Connection cable 3) Connection cable 1) Series name Connecti on diagram number Connecti
PAGE 508
16.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the servo amplifier. 16.3.1 (1) Cable length RS-232 cable The length of the cable RS-232 must be 15m or less.  Connection diagram (2) GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
PAGE 509
9 RS-422 cable MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 16.3.
PAGE 510
RS422 connection diagram 3) RS422 connection diagram 6) GOT side Distributor side (Modular connector) SDA 1 3 RDP LG 1 RDA 2 5 SDP P5D 2 RSA 3 2 P5D RDP 3 CSA 4 7 LG SDN 4 SG 5 1 LG SDP 5 SDB 6 6 RDN RDN 6 RDB 7 4 SDN LG 7 RSB 8 8 NC NC 8 CSB 9 FG - *1 RS422 connection diagram 4) Distributor side (Modular connector) Distributor side (Modular connector) LG 1 1 LG P5D 2 2 P5D RDP 3 3 RDP SDN 4 4 SDN SDP 5 5 SDP RDN 6 6 RDN LG
PAGE 511
9 RXD+(RDA) SDP 3 RXD-(RDB) 4 TXD+(SDA) 1 TXD-(SDB) Distributor SDN RDP RDN 2 SG(GND) 5 RTS+(RSA) 6 RTS-(RSB) 7 CTS+(CSA) 8 CTS-(CSB) 9 LG LG TRE Distributor SDP 9 SDN 19 RDP 5 RDN 15 LG 11 LG 1 TRE 10 Plate 9 19 5 15 11 1 10 Plate *1 Distributor SDP SDN RDP RDN LG LG TRE 9 19 5 10 15 11 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) GOT side MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) RS422 connection diagram 7) 1 10 Plate *1 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONN
PAGE 512
16.4 GOT Side Settings 16.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 16.4.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. Set the channel of the connected equipment. 2. 3. Item 4. Transmission Speed Data Bit Click! Stop Bit Parity 1. 2. 3. 4. Select [Common] menu. [Controller Setting] from the The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Set the following items.
PAGE 513
MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 HINT Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal device, GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller. For example, faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system. For details of the setting contents of GOT internal device, refer to the following manual.
PAGE 514
16.5 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side Model name Refer to MELSERVO-J2-Super Series 16.5.1 MELSERVO-J2M Series 16.5.2 MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series 16.5.3 16.5.1 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series POINT  Parameters of MELSERVO-J2-Super Series Enter the parameters of the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series. Item Set value Basic parameter No. 15 Station number setting: 0 to 31 (Default: 0)*1 Serial communication function selection (Default: 0000) Basic parameter No.
PAGE 515
POINT MELSERVO-J2M Series For details of the MELSERVO-J2M Series, refer to the following manual. 9 POINT (1) Parameter setting Set the parameter at the pushbutton switch provided on the operation section of the servo amplifier or setup software. See the technical manual for the MELSERVOJ2M Series servo amplifiers. MODE Enter the parameters of the MELSERVO-J2M Series. Item DOWN SET (2) When changing the parameter Turn off then on the servo amplifier to be effective the new parameter.
PAGE 516
16.5.3 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J4,J3 Series 16.5.4 Station number setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps. The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order. There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive. POINT MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series For details of the MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series, refer to the following manual. See the technical manual for the MELSERVOJ4, J3 Series servo amplifiers. Station NO.
PAGE 517
(a) Device Definition dialog box When setting a device on the Device dialog box and click the [Device Definition...] button, the correspondence between the GOT virtual device for a servo amplifier and the definition of the servo amplifier is displayed. 1. 2. 3. 3. (1) Servo amplifier 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows.
PAGE 518
(2) MELSERVO-J2M-P8A If the above data length was not set, data would not be set to the servo amplifier correctly or the GOT can not monitor normally. (a) Monitoring • When the 16-bit data is handled as 32-bit data, the upper 16bits are displayed as 0. • When the 32-bit data is handled as 16-bit data, the lower 16bits only are displayed as 0. (b) Writing The GOT writes within the range of data length set.
PAGE 519
(b) Operation mode selection Device name Item Symbol OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) ― OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output ― (c) Basic parameter/expansion parameter Device name Item Symbol PRM0, PRM1000 *BPS PRM1, PRM1001 Regenerative brake option selection *REG PRM2, PRM1002 Function selection 1 *OP1 PRM3, PRM1003 Analog monitor 1 output MD1 PRM4, PRM1004 Analog monitor 2 output MD2 PRM5, PRM1005 Analog monitor 3 output MD3 PRM6, PRM1006 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1
PAGE 520
(3) MELSERVO-J2M-*DU Bit device Device name *2 Servo amplifier request (SP) SP0 Operation mode selection (OM) OM0 Instruction demand (for test operation) (TMB) TMB0 Basic parameter Expansion parameter to to to SP6 OM4 TMB1 PRM0 to PRM1000 to PRM84 PRM1084 Status display (ST) ST0 to ST10 Alarm (AL) AL0 AL11 AL200 AL210 AL230 to to to to AL21 AL205 AL215 AL235 (PRM) Word device Setting range *1 Input signal for test operation (for test operation) (TMI) Device No.
PAGE 521
Symbol ― ST1 Servo motor speed ― *ENR ST2 Droop pulses ― TL1 ST3 Cumulative command pulses ― ― ST4 Command pulse frequency ― ST5 Effective load ratio ― ST6 Peak load ratio ― ST7 Instantaneous torque ― ST8 Within one-revolution position ― ST9 ABS counter ― ST10 Load inertia moment ratio ― PRM27, PRM1027 Encoder output pulses PRM28, PRM1028 Internal torque limit 1 PRM29 to PRM32, PRM1029 to PRM1032 For manufacturer setting PRM33, PRM1033 Electromagnetic brake sequence
PAGE 522
Item Symbol AL215 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fifth alarm in past AL230 Detailed alarm from alarm history most recent alarm ― AL231 Detailed alarm from alarm history first alarm in past ― AL232 Detailed alarm from alarm history second alarm in past ― AL233 Detailed alarm from alarm history third alarm in past ― AL234 Detailed alarm from alarm history fourth alarm in past ― AL235 Detailed alarm from alarm history fifth alarm in past ― (4) MELSERVO-J2S-*A ― *2 Servo amplifie
PAGE 523
VCM PRM26, PRM1026 Analog torque command maximum output TLC Status display data clear ― SP1 Current alarm clear ― PRM27, PRM1027 Encoder output pulses SP2 Alarm history clear ― PRM28, PRM1028 Internal torque limit 1 TL1 SP3 External input signal prohibited ― SP4 External output signal prohibited ― PRM29, PRM1029 Analog speed command offset /limit offset VCO PRM30, PRM1030 Analog torque command offset /limit offset TLO PRM31,PRM1031 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1 PRM32, PRM1032
PAGE 524
Device name Item Symbol*1 PRM70, PRM1070 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 3 CMX3 PRM71, PRM1071 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 4 CMX4 PRM72, PRM1072 Internal speed command4/limit4 SC4 PRM73, PRM1073 Internal speed command5/limit5 SC5 PRM74, PRM1074 Internal speed command6/limit6 SC6 PRM75, PRM1075 Internal speed command7/limit7 SC7 PRM76, PRM1076 Internal torque limit 2 TL2 PRM77 to PRM84, For manufacturer setting PRM1077 to PRM1084 *1 (e) Status display Item
PAGE 525
(PRM)*1 TMB0 to TMB1 PRM0 to PRM1000 to PRM90 PRM1090 Status display (ST) ST0 to ST16 Alarm (AL) AL0 AL11 AL200 AL210 AL230 to to to to to AL1 AL27 AL205 AL215 AL235 External input (DI)*4 DI0 to DI2 External output (DO) DO0 to DO1 Point table POS1 to POS1001 to POS31 POS1031 SPD1 to SPD1001 to SPD31 SPD1031 (position) (POS)*2 Point table Point table (speed) Word device OM4 (SPD)*2 Point table (acceleration time constant) (ACT)*2 Point table (deceleration time ACT1 ACT1001 to t
PAGE 526
Device name (d) Basic parameter/expansion parameter Device name Item PRM46, PRM1046 Symbol*1 PRM47, PRM1047 PRM48, PRM1048 Item Symbol*1 Software limit + *LMP Software limit - *LMN Position range output address + *LPP Position range output address - *LNP PRM0, PRM1000 Command system/ regenerative brake option selection *STY PRM1, PRM1001 Feeding function selection *FTY PRM51, PRM1051 PRM2, PRM1002 Function selection 1 *OP1 PRM52, PRM1052 PRM3, PRM1003 Auto tuning ATU PRM53, PRM1
PAGE 527
AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs current position ― AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs command position ― AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs command remaining distance ― AL14 Servo status when alarm occurs point table No.
PAGE 528
(6) MELSERVO-J2S-*CL Bit device Device name *2 Servo amplifier request (SP) SP0 to SP6 Operation mode selection (OM) OM0 to OM4 Instruction demand (for test operation) (TMB) TMB0 Basic parameter /expansion parameter to TMB1 PRM0 to PRM1000 to PRM90 PRM1090 Status display (ST) ST0 to ST17 Alarm (AL) AL0 AL11 AL200 AL210 AL230 to to to to to AL1 AL28 AL205 AL215 AL235 External input (DI)*4 DI0 to DI2 External output(DO) DO0 to DO1 (PRM) Word device Setting range *1 Devic
PAGE 529
*LPP Position range output address- *LNP Command system/ regenerative brake option selection *STY PRM1, PRM1001 Feeding function selection *FTY PRM53, PRM1053 PRM2, PRM1002 Function selection 1 *OP1 PRM54, PRM1054 For manufacturer setting PRM3, PRM1003 Auto tuning ATU PRM55, PRM1055 Function selection 6 PRM4, PRM1004 Electronic gear numerator *CMX PRM56, PRM1056 For manufacturer setting PRM5, PRM1005 Electronic gear denominator *CDV PRM57, PRM1057 Function selection 8 PRM6, PRM1
PAGE 530
Device name (f) Alarm Device name Item Symbol AL0 Current alarm number ― AL1 Detailed data of current alarms ― AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs Current position ― AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs Command position ― AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs Command remaining distance ― AL14 Servo status when alarm occurs Program Number AL15 Item Symbol AL234 Detailed alarm from Alarm History fourth alarm in past ― AL235 Detailed alarm from Alarm History fifth alarm in past ― (g)
PAGE 531
to OM4 Instruction demand (for test operation) (TMB) Symbol SP0 Status display data clear ― SP1 Current alarm clear ― SP2 Alarm history clear ― TMB1 to TMB6 SP3 External input signal prohibited ― PA1 PA1001 to to PA19 PA1019 SP4 External output signal prohibited ― SP5 External input signal resumed ― PB1 PB1001 to to PB45 PB1045 SP6 External output signal resumed ― PC1 PC1001 to to PC50 PC1050 I/O setting parameter (PD)*1 PD1 PD1001 to to PD30 PD1030 Status display (S
PAGE 532
(e) Gain filter parameter Device name (f) Extension setting parameter Item PB1, PB1001 Adaptive tuning mode (Adaptive filter II) PA2, PB1002 Vibration suppression control filter tuning mode (Advanced vibration suppression control) Symbol*1 FILT Device name Item Symbol*1 PC1, PC1001 Acceleration time constant STA PC2, PC1002 Deceleration time constant STB PC3, PC1003 S-pattern acceleration/ deceleration time constant STC PC4, PC1004 Torque command time constant TQC PC5, PC1005 Internal
PAGE 533
― AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs servo monitor speed ― AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs droop pulses ― AL14 Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative command pulses ― AL15 Servo status when alarm occurs command pulse frequency ― AL16 Servo status when alarm occurs analog speed command voltage /limit voltage ― AL17 Servo status when alarm occurs analog torque command voltage /limit voltage ― AL18 Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative load ratio ― AL19 Servo status when al
PAGE 534
(j) External input Device name Item Symbol DI0 Input device statuses ― DI1 External input pin statuses ― DI2 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication ― (k) External output Device name Item Symbol DO0 Output device statuses ― DO1 External output pin statuses ― (l) Input signal for test operation (for test operation) Device name TMI0 Item Symbol Input signal for test operation ― (m) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) Device name TMO0 Item Forced o
PAGE 535
OM5 Instruction demand (for test operation) (TMB) TMB1 to TMB6 PA1 PA1001 to to PA19 PA1019 PB1 PB1001 to to PB45 PB1045 PC1 PC1001 to to PC50 PC1050 PD1 PD1001 to to PD30 PD1030 (PO)*1 PO1 PO1001 to to PO35 PO1035 Status display (ST)*4 ST0 to ST17 Alarm (AL)*4 AL0 AL11 AL200 AL210 AL230 to to to to to AL1 AL28 AL205 AL215 AL235 (PA)*1 Gain filter parameter (PB) *1 Extension setting parameter (PC)*1 I/O setting parameter (PD)*1 Option unit parameter External input (DI)*6 DI
PAGE 536
Device name (d) Basic setting parameter Device name Item Symbol*1 Item PB29, PB1029 Gain changing, Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment Symbol*1 GD2B PA1, PA1001 Control mode *STY PB30, PB1030 Gain changing, Position loop gain PG2B PA2, PA1002 Regenerative brake option *REG PB31, PB1031 Gain changing, Speed loop gain VG2B PA3, PA1003 Absolute position detection system *ABS PB32, PB1032 Gain changing, Speed integral compensation VICB PA4, PA1004 Function selec
PAGE 537
Symbol 9 PO7, PO1007 MR-J3-D01 Input signal device selection 6 (CN10-35, 36) *ODI6 PO8, PO1008 MR-J3-D01 Output signal device selection 1 (CN10-46, 47) *ODO1 PO9, PO1009 MR-J3-D01 Output signal device selection 2 (CN10-48, 49) *ODO2 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) PO10, PO1010 Function selection 0-1 *OOP1 PO11, PO1011 For manufacturer setting PO12, PO1012 Function selection 0-3 *OOP3 *DIA1 PO13, PO1013 MR-J3-D01 Analog monitor 1 output MOD1 ― PO14, PO1014 MR-J3-D01 Anal
PAGE 538
(j) Alarm Device name (k) External input Item Device name Symbol Item Symbol AL0 Current alarm number ― DI0 Input device statuses 1 ― AL1 Detailed data of current alarms ― DI1 Input device statuses 2 ― AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs Current position ― DI2 Input device statuses 3 ― AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs Command position ― DI3 External input pin statuses 1 ― AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs Command remaining distance ― DI4 External input pin statuses 2
PAGE 539
OM0 to OM4 Instruction demand (for test operation) (TMB) TMB1 to TMB6 PA1 PA1001 to to PA32 PA1032 PB1 PB1001 to to PB64 PB1064 PC1 PC1001 to to PC80 PC1080 PD1 PD1001 to to PD48 PD1048 PE1 PE1001 to to PE64 PE1064 parameter (PF)*1 PF1 PF1001 to to PF48 PF1048 Status display (ST)*3 ST0 to ST41 Alarm (AL)*3 AL0 AL11 AL200 AL210 AL230 to to to to to AL1 AL25 AL205 AL215 AL235 Alarm (ALM)*3 ALM0 ALM11 ALM200 ALM220 ALM240 to to to to to ALM1 ALM52 ALM215 ALM235 ALM255 Exte
PAGE 540
Item Symbol*1 PB17, PB1017 Shaft resonance suppression filter NHF PB18, PB1018 Low-pass filter setting LPF PB19, PB1019 Vibration suppression control 1 - Vibration frequency VRF11 PB20, PB1020 Vibration suppression control 1 - Resonance frequency VRF12 *AOP1 PB21, PB1021 Vibration suppression control 1 - Vibration frequency dumping VRF13 PB22, PB1022 Vibration suppression control 1 - Resonance frequency dumping VRF14 PB23, PB1023 Low-pass filter selection VFBF PB24, PB1024 Slight vi
PAGE 541
PC38, PC1038 For manufacturer setting ― PC39, PC1039 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1 PC40, PC1040 Analog monitor 2 offset MO2 PC41 to 42, PC1041 to 1042 For manufacturer setting ― *1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.
PAGE 542
Device name (h) Extension setting 2 parameter Device name Item PE1 to 40, PE1000 to 1040 For manufacturer setting PE41, PE1041 Function selection E-3 PE42 to 64, PE1042 to 1064 For manufacturer setting (i) Symbol ― EOP3 ― ST33 Setting time ― Oscillation detection frequency ― ST35 Number of tough drives ― ST36 to 39 For manufacturer setting ― ST40 Unit power consumption 1 (incremwnt of 1 W) ― ST41 Unit total power consumption 1 (incremwnt of 1 Wh) ― (k) Alarm (compatible with MELS
PAGE 543
― AL232 Detailed alarm from Alarm History second alarm in past ― ALM205 Alarm number from Alarm History 5th alarm in past ― AL233 Detailed alarm from Alarm History third alarm in past ― ALM206 AL234 Detailed alarm from Alarm History fourth alarm in past ― ALM207 AL235 Detailed alarm from Alarm History fifth alarm in past ― ALM208 Alarm number from Alarm History 8th alarm in past ― ALM209 Alarm number from Alarm History 9th alarm in past ― ALM210 Alarm number from Alarm History 10th
PAGE 544
Device name Item Symbol ALM246 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 6th alarm in past ― ALM247 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 7th alarm in past ― ALM248 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 8th alarm in past ― ALM249 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 9th alarm in past ― ALM250 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 10th alarm in past ― ALM251 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 11th alarm in past ― ALM252 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 12th alarm in past ― ALM253 Detailed alarm from Alarm
PAGE 545
MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 16.7 Precautions  Station number setting in the servo system Make sure to establish servo system with the station number set with the host address. For details of host address setting, refer to the following. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 16.4.
PAGE 546
16 - 46 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.
PAGE 547
ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 17 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 17.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 2 17.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 3 17.4 PLC Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 6 17.5 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 8 17.6 Precautions . . . . . . . .
PAGE 548
17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Series Model name Robot controller Clock CRnD-700 Communication type Refer to Ethernet 17.2.1 For details on the connection with CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU), refer to Mitsubishi Products (Chapter 5 to 13). 17.2 System Configuration 17.2.
PAGE 549
Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 17.3.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.  GT16 2. 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 3. 2. 3. 4. Select [Common] menu. [Controller Setting] from the The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. 1 to 239 GOT PLC No. Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 64 Set the IP address of the GOT. (Default: 192.168.3.18) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.
PAGE 550
*1 Click the [Setting] button and perform the setting in the [GOT IP Address Setting] screen.  GT15, GT12 Item Description Range GOT NET No. Set the network No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 239 GOT PLC No. Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 64 GOT IP Address Set the IP address of the GOT. (Default: 192.168.0.18) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask for the sub network.
PAGE 551
17.3.3 17 Ethernet setting ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION POINT Example of [Detail setting]. For examples of [Detail setting], refer to the following. 17.4 PLC Side Settings Range Host N/W No. Set the network No. of the connected Ethernet module. 1 to 239 (Default: blank) PLC No. Set the station No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: blank) 1 to 64 Type*1 Set the type of the connected Ethernet module.
PAGE 552
17.4 PLC Side Settings Model Robot controller 17.4.1 Reference CRnD-700 17.4.1 (2) For R32TB or R56TB Connecting to robot controller (CRnD-700) This section describes the settings of a GOT and a robot controller in the following case of system configuration. POINT Robot controller (CRnD-700) For details of the robot controller (CRnD-700), refer to the following manual.
PAGE 553
17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION POINT [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 17.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) CNC CONNECTION 18  Confirming communication state of CRnD700 (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows®. Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Windows®. (a) When normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19 Reply from 192.168.0.
PAGE 554
17.5 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range that can be used on the GOT, refer to the following. 2.1 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 17.6 Precautions  When setting IP address Do not use "0" and "255" at the end of an IP address. (Numbers of *.*.*.0 and *.*.*.255 are used by the system) The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with the above numbers. Consult with the administrator of the network before setting an IP address to the GOT and controller.
PAGE 555
18. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 18 17 CNC CONNECTION 18.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 7 18.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 8 18.5 CNC Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 16 18.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 23 18.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 556
18. CNC CONNECTION 18.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Series MELDAS C6/C64 *1 Model name FCA C6 FCA C64 *1 *2 Clock Communication type RS-232 RS-422 18.2.1 MELSECNET/10*2 18.2.2 CC-Link(ID) 18.2.3 Ethernet 18.2.4 Use the NC system software version D0 or later. Includes the case on the MELSECNET/H network system in the NET/10 mode. The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I/O network..
PAGE 557
17 18.2.1 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18.2 System Configuration Direct connection to CPU MELDAS C6/C64 F311 cable GOT Communication driver Connection cable AJ71C24, MELDAS C6* CNC CONNECTION 18 F311 cable Communi cation type - RS-232 MELDAS C6/C64 *1 Cable model RS232 connection diagram GOT Max. distance Option device Model Number of connectable equipment 20 - (Built into GOT) 15m GT15-RS2-9P 1 GOT for 1 PLC GT16-C02R4-9S(0.
PAGE 558
18.2.2 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) POINT (1) Connectable network MELSECNET/10 connection includes the case that MELSECNET/H is used in NET/10 mode.The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I/O network. Connect the GOT to the following network systems as an ordinary station.
PAGE 559
17 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) Communication driver Communication driver CC-Link Ver2(ID) CC-Link(ID) MELDAS C6/C64 Expansion unit 18 CNC CONNECTION (When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 (When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used) CC-Link communication unit is used) ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18.2.
PAGE 560
18.2.
PAGE 561
17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the CNC. 18 RS-232 cable CNC CONNECTION 18.3.
PAGE 562
18.4 GOT Side Settings 18.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) POINT The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Set the channel of the connected equipment. 2. 1.1.2 I/F communication setting 3. 4. 18.4.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. (1) AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6* Click! 1. 2. 3. 4. Select [Common] menu.
PAGE 563
17 (3) MELSECNET/10 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION (2) MELSECNET/H • MNET/H mode • MNET/10 mode • MNET/H EXT mode Network Type Set the network type. (Default: MNET/H mode) Network No. Set the network No. (Default: 1) 1 to 239 Station No. Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 64 Set the operation mode of the GOT. (Default: Online (auto.
PAGE 564
(4) CC-Link Ver.2 (ID) Item (5) CC-Link(ID) Description Range Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 64 Set the transmission speed and the mode of the GOT. (Default: 0) 0 to E Set the mode of CC-Link. (Default: Ver.1) Ver.1/Ver.2/ Additional/ Offline Expanded Cyclic Set the cyclic point expansion. (Default: Single) Single/ Double/ Quadruple/ Octuple Occupied Station Set the number of stations occupied by the GOT.
PAGE 565
*1 (6) Ethernet(MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION (a) GT16, GT14 Click the [Setting] button and perform the setting in the [GOT IP Address Setting] screen. CNC CONNECTION 18 19 Range GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Description GOT NET No. Set the network No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 239 GOT PLC No. Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 64 Set the IP address of the GOT. (Default: 192.168.3.18) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.
PAGE 566
(b) GT15, GT12 POINT (1) Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GT User's Manual (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. Item Description Range GOT NET No. Set the network No. of the GOT.
PAGE 567
75JBR13-Z) POINT Switch setting of the communication unit When using the MELSECNET/H communication unit, the switch setting is not needed. Description Range Host The host is displayed. (The host is indicated with an asterisk (*)) ― N/W No. Set the network No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: blank) PLC No. Set the station No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: blank) CNC*1 RUN PC R.LOOP GROUP No.
PAGE 568
 Switch setting (Only when MODEL GT15- (3) Station number setting switch Station number setting switch 5 6 X1 9 0 1 5 6 2 3 4 X10 7 8 STATION No. 7 8 2 3 4 Description Set the station No. of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit. Set to not duplicate other stations in the network.
PAGE 569
17 Description Specify the transmission speed. (Default: 0) Set value 0: 156kbps 1: 625kbps 2: 2.5Mbps 3: 5Mbps 4: 10Mbps 18 CNC CONNECTION 23 456 901 Transmission baudrate setting switch ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION (3) Transmission baudrate setting switch 78 (4) Condition setting switches Description SW1 Specify input data status of the data link error station. (Default: OFF) OFF: Cleared ON: Held SW2 Specify the number of stations occupied.
PAGE 570
18.5 CNC Side Settings 18.5.1 MELSECNET/10 connection  Parameter setting Set parameters related to MELSECNET/10 with MELSEC's peripheral devices in the same way as parameter setting of MELSEC CPU, and write them on CNC by Personal computer.
PAGE 571
17  Expansion unit settings 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1) Set the operation condition. SW Description OFF ON 1 Network type*1 Inter-PC net (PC) Remote I/O net 2 Station type*4 Normal station (N.ST) Control station (MNG) Common parameters (PRM) Default parameter (D.
PAGE 572
(2) FCU6-EX878 (Coaxial cable) Switch layout No. Switch name Settings Set the operation condition. Condition setting switch 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1) SW Description type*1 OFF ON Inter-PC net (PC) Remote I/O net 1 Network 2 Station type*4 Normal station (N.ST) Control station (MNG) 3 Used parameter*2 Common parameters (PRM) Default parameter (D.
PAGE 573
CC-Link (ID) connection Make the communication settings by the setting switch in the expansion unit (FCU6-HR865).  Parameter setting Set parameters related to CC-Link connection with GX Developer and write them to CNC by PLC. However, in the case of using the local stations, it is not necessary to set the network parameters.
PAGE 574
(2) Contents of setting No. Switch name Settings Set the operation condition. Switch status Condition setting switch 1) Setting validity OFF ON Master station (Standby master station) Local station (Standby master station) Station type*1 Master station/local station Standby master station (Valid) (Valid) SW2 Not used Always OFF - - SW3 Not used Always OFF - - valid valid Invalid valid No.
PAGE 575
Ethernet (192.168.1.xx) [Communication with GOT] N/W No. :239 PLC No. :2 IP address :192.168.1.2 (1) Network parameter setting Set the network parameters by peripheral device and write them on CNC. An example of parameter setting by GPPW is as follows. Set the first I/O No. as follows according to the expansion slot to which the unit is inserted. (a) Unit No. Slot position Start I/O No.
PAGE 576
(b) Example of GX Developer setting (2) CNC side parameter setting Confirm the CNC side parameter setting with the settings of IP address, gateway address, subnet mask and port No. by the 7-segment LED and rotary switch of the CNC side. For details of the parameter setting operation, refer to the following. For details of the parameter setting, refer to the following.
PAGE 577
17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18.6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details of the device range that can be used on the GOT, refer to the following. 2.3 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 * 18.7 Precautions 18.7.2 MELSECNET/10 connection  Network configuration Use the MELSECNET/10 mode of MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network) or MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC network) to configure a network including the GOT.
PAGE 578
18.7.4 Ethernet connection  Version of CNC  Via network system GOT with Ethernet communication cannot access the CNCs in another network via the CNC (network module, Ethernet module, etc.).  When connecting to multiple GOTs When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network, set each [PLC No.] to the GOT. 18.4.
PAGE 579
MULTIPLE GOT CONNECTIONS 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 1 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 580
PAGE 581
GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19. 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 17 19.2 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 3 19.3 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 14 19.4 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 15 19.5 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 23 19.
PAGE 582
19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.1 CPU that can be Monitored The GOT can monitor only a CPU to which a serial multi-drop connection unit (GT01-RS4-M) is connected directly. Serial Multi-Drop Unit 19 - 2 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.
PAGE 583
 Connecting the CPU to the Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit (hereinafter referred to as "master module") directly The following table shows the connectable models.
PAGE 584
Communication type Series MELSEC-Q (A mode)*3 Model name Q02CPU-A Clock Between CPU and master module Between master module and GOT RS-232 RS-422 Q02HCPU-A Q06HCPU-A Q2ACPU MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU)*2*3 Q2ACPU-S1 RS-422 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU RS-422 Q2ASCPU MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1 (QnASCPU)*2*3 Q2ASHCPU RS-422 Q2ASHCPU-S1 A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 RS-485 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 MELSEC-A (AnCPU)*4 A3ACPUR21 RS-422 A1NCPU*1 A1NCPUP21 *
PAGE 585
17 Communication type Model name Clock Between CPU and master module Between master module and GOT ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION Series A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU (AnSCPU)*5 A2SCPU*1 18 RS-422 CNC CONNECTION MELSEC-A A2SHCPU A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPUP21*1 A0J2HCPUR21*1 RS-422 19 RS-422 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION A0J2HCPU*1 A0J2HCPU-DC24*1 MELSEC-A*5 A2CCPU*1 A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 20 A2CCPUC24-PRF A1FXCPU MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECT
PAGE 586
Communication type Series Model name Clock Between CPU and master module Between master module and GOT A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN Motion controller A172SHCPU CPU (A Series)*2 A172SHCPUN RS-422 A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 MELSEC-WS MELSECNET/H remote I/O station CC-Link IE Field Network head module CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module CNC C70 Robot controller WS0-CPU0 RS-232 WS0-CPU1 QJ72LP25-25 QJ72LP25G RS-232 QJ72BR15 LJ72GF15-T2 - NZ2GF-ETB - Q173NCCPU RS-232 CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) R
PAGE 587
17 Communication type Model name Clock Between CPU and master module Between master module and GOT ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION Series FREQROL-A500/A500L FREQROL-F500/F500L FREQROL-V500/V500L FREQROL-E500 18 FREQROL-S500/S500E FREQROL-D700 CNC CONNECTION FREQROL FREQROL-F500J RS-422 FREQROL-F700PJ FREQROL-E700 FREQROL-A700 FREQROL-F700 RS-485 FREQROL-F700P CP MR-J2S- CL MR-J2M-P8A MR-J2M- DU MR-J3- A MR-J3- T MR-J4- A GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION A MR-J2S- RS-232 RS-422 20 MULTIPL
PAGE 588
 Connecting the CPU to the Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit (hereinafter referred to as "master module") in computer link connection The following table shows the connectable models.
PAGE 589
17 Communication type (A mode)*1 Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A Q06HCPU-A Clock Between CPU and master module Between master module and GOT ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION MELSEC-Q Model name RS-232 RS-422 Q2ACPU (QnACPU)*1 Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU 18 RS-232 RS-422 CNC CONNECTION MELSEC-QnA Q4ARCPU Q2ASCPU MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1 (QnASCPU)*1 Q2ASHCPU RS-232 RS-422 19 Q2ASHCPU-S1 A2UCPU GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 20 A2ACPU-S1 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT
PAGE 590
Communication type Series Model name Clock Between CPU and master module Between master module and GOT A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 MELSEC-A A1SHCPU (AnSCPU) A2SCPU RS-232 RS-422 A2SHCPU A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 RS-422 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 - A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU RS-232 RS-422 RS-485 Q172CPU*1*2 Q173CPU *1*2 Q172CPUN *1*2 RS-232 RS-422 Q173CPUN*1*2 Q172HCPU Q173HCPU Motion controller CPU
PAGE 591
17 Communication type Clock Between CPU and master module Between master module and GOT ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION Model name A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN Motion controller CPU (A Series) A172SHCPU RS-232 RS-422 A172SHCPUN 18 A173UHCPU CC-Link IE Field Network head module - WS0-CPU1 QJ72LP25-25 RS-232 RS-422 QJ72LP25G QJ72BR15 LJ72GF15-T2 - CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF-ETB - CNC C70 Q173NCCPU RS-232 RS-422 Robot controller CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) - FX0 - FX0S RS
PAGE 592
Communication type Series Model name Clock Between CPU and master module Between master module and GOT FREQROL-A500/A500L FREQROL-F500/F500L FREQROL-V500/V500L FREQROL-E500 FREQROL-S500/S500E FREQROL FREQROL-F500J FREQROL-D700 RS-422 FREQROL-F700PJ FREQROL-E700 FREQROL-A700 FREQROL-F700 RS-485 FREQROL-F700P MELIPM MELSERVO 19 - 12 MD-CX522MR-J2S- A MR-J2S- CP MR-J2S- CL MR-J2M-P8A MR-J2M- DU MR-J3- A MR-J3- T MR-J4- A K(-A0) RS-232 RS-422 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.
PAGE 593
The following table shows the [Controller Type] and [Communication driver] of GT Designer3 for which the GOT multi-drop connection is available.
PAGE 594
19.3 System Configuration Communication driver Communication driver Connection type dependent Multi-Drop (Slave) (Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit) Serial multi drop connection unit PLC Varies according to the connection type.
PAGE 595
17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 19.4 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the cable connection between the serial multi-drop connection unit and the GOT. 19.4.
PAGE 596
RS485 connection diagram 2) (For 1 pair wiring) Serial multi drop connection unit *2 CON side*3(20 pin) SDA*1 SDA1(TXD1+) SDB*1 SDB1(TXD1-) RDA1(RXD1+) RDA RDB1(RXD1-) RDB SG SG NC *5 *5 NC NC SDA2(TXD2+) SDB2(TXD2-) RDA2(RXD2+) RDB2(RXD2-) NC RSA(RTS+) NC RSB(RTS-) NC CSA(CTS+) NC CSB(CTS-) CON side*3(20 pin) SDA2(TXD2+) 6 SDB2(TXD2-) 8 RDA2(RXD2+) 10 RDB2(RXD2-) 12 SG 2 NC 1 NC 3 NC 4 SDA1(TXD1+) 5 SDB1(TXD1-) 7 9 RDA1(RXD1+) *5 *5 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 RDB1(RXD1-
PAGE 597
17 RS485 connection diagram 2) RDB*1 SDB1(TXD1-) SDA*1 RDA1(RXD1+) *1 RDB1(RXD1-) SG SG NC *5 *5 NC NC SDA2(TXD2+) SDB2(TXD2-) RDA2(RXD2+) RDB2(RXD2-) NC RSA(RTS+) NC RSB(RTS-) NC CSA(CTS+) NC CSB(CTS-) SDB2(TXD2-) 8 RDA2(RXD2+) 10 RDB2(RXD2-) 12 SG 2 NC 1 NC 3 NC 4 SDA1(TXD1+) 5 SDB1(TXD1-) 7 RDA1(RXD1+) 9 RDB1(RXD1-) 11 NC 13 *5 14 *5 RSA(RTS+) NC 15 16 RSB(RTS-) NC 17 18 CSA(CTS+) NC 19 20 CSB(CTS-) SDA1(TXD1+) 5 SDB1(TXD1-) 7 RDA1(RXD1+) 9 RDB1(RXD1-) 11
PAGE 598
RS485 connection diagram 3) (For 1 pair wiring) Serial multi drop connection unit *2 GOT side*3 SDA*1 SDA1 SDB*1 SDB1 RDA1 RDA RDB1 RDB SG SG *5 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 FG 1 2 3 4 9 5 6 7 8 10 GOT side*3 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 SG SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 FG 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 10 *1 Use the twisted pair cable for SDA/SDB. *2 *3 Set the terminating resistor selector to "110 ". Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable".
PAGE 599
17 RS485 connection diagram 4) SDB SDB RDA RDA RDB RDB *3 SG SG *5 RSA RSB CSA CSB *4 SDA 1 SDB 6 RDA 2 RDB 7 *3 SG 5 *5 3 RSA RSB 8 CSA 4 CSB 9 GOT side*2 *3 *4 SDA 1 SDB 6 RDA 2 RDB 7 *3 SG 5 *5 3 RSA RSB 8 CSA 4 CSB 9 *4 1 6 18 2 CNC CONNECTION SDA SDA GOT side*1 *3 7 5 3 8 4 19 9 *1 Set the terminating resistor selector to "OPEN". *2 Set the terminating resistor selector to "110 ". *3 1.4.
PAGE 600
RS485 connection diagram 5) (For 1 pair wiring) Serial multi drop connection unit *1 GOT side*2 GOT side*2 SDA SDA SDA SDA SDB SDB SDB SDB RDA RDA RDA RDA RDB RDB RDB RDB SG SG SG *3 *1 *2 *3 GOT side*2 *3 SG *3 Set the terminating resistor selector to "110 ". 19.6.3 Setting switches Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor as follows.
PAGE 601
17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION POINT Mixed wiring with various GOTs The GOT multi-drop connection can be used with various GOTs mixed.
PAGE 602
 Precautions when preparing a cable (3) GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. (1) Cable Use a shielded twisted pair cable of 0.3mm2 or more as a cable for GOT multi-drop connection.The following shows recommended model names and manufacturers of the cable to be used. Manufacturer Model Mitsubishi Cable Industries,Ltd Remark Two-pair cable of SPEV(SB)-0.5-2P Showa Electric Wire & Cable Co.,Ltd Sumitomo Electric Industries.,Ltd The Furukawa Electric Co.,Ltd 0.
PAGE 603
19.5.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select [Common] menu. 19.5.2 Communication detail settings Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. POINT The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. 1.1.
PAGE 604
19.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit 19.6.1 Write the OS 19.6.2 Write the standard monitor OS and communication driver according to the desired connection type onto the serial multi-drop connection unit. For the OS writing methods, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version Screen design manual Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Make the Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit interface setting on [Communication with GT01-RS4-M] of GT Designer 3.
PAGE 605
 Setting the multi-drop system information function When checking the connection status of each GOT which is connected to GT01-RS4-M on the PLC side, set the multi-drop system information function. The GOT connection status is stored in the PLC side word device. 18 CNC CONNECTION (1) Setting on the PLC side word device 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION  Controller setting GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 Set the following to the driver for the connected equipment.
PAGE 606
(2) Assignment contents of the PLC side word device The following table shows the device assignment contents when setting [Head Device (10 Points)] to "D0".
PAGE 607
setting contents (1) Export 17  Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. (3) For the connection with GOT ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION  Exporting/Importing the communication CNC CONNECTION 18 (2) 1. Description 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment.
PAGE 608
19.6.3 Setting switches Set the switches according to the connection type. POINT Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit For details on the Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit, refer to the following manual. Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit User’s Manual Terminating resistor selector switch 19 - 28 PLC communication selection switch 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.
PAGE 609
17 19.7.1 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 19.7 Setting of connection conversion adapter Setting switches Set the switches according to the connection type. 18 CNC CONNECTION POINT Connection conversion adapter For details on the connection conversion adapter, refer to the following manual.
PAGE 610
19.8 Precautions  Connecting GT16 and GT15 in multi-drop connection  Using the multi-drop connection in the multichannel configuration (1) Standard monitor OS installation, Writing Communication driver When connecting GT16/GT15 in multi-drop connection, the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver to the GOT from GT Designer3 (Version 1.12N or later), as well as the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver to the serial multi-drop connection unit are required.
PAGE 611
ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 20 17 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 20.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 2 20.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 2 20.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 5 20.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 612
20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.1 Connectable Model List For details of connectable models, refer to the following. 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 20.2 System Configuration 20.2.
PAGE 613
Communic ation type For the system configuration between a got and A plc, refer to the following. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Option device (Built into GOT) Model RS-422 Cable model RS422 connection diagram 2) GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) RS-232 (Built into GOT) RS-232 GT10-C02H-6PT9P (0.2m) + RS232 connection COMPUTER Max.
PAGE 614
20.2.2 Connecting the GOT to PLC via RS-422 interface Communication driver Communication driver A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24 QnA/L/Q CPU MELSEC-A ( For GT14, GT12, GT11) ( For GT10) ( For GT10) Communication driver GOT (1st) PLC Communication driver MELSEC-FX GOT (2nd) Connection cable Varies according to the connection type.
PAGE 615
17 RS232 connection diagram 1) 1 6 RS RD (RXD) 2 1 SD (TXD) SD (TXD) 3 2 RD (RXD) ER (DTR) 4 4 DR (DSR) GOT side GOT side SG 5 5 SG N.C. 1 1 N.C. DR (DSR) 6 3 ER (DTR) RD(RXD) 2 3 SD(TXD) RS (RTS) 7 7 CS (CTS) SD(TXD) 3 2 RD(RXD) CS (CTS) 8 8 N.C. ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR) - 9 9 N.C. SG 5 5 SG DR(DSR) 6 4 ER(DTR) RS232 connection diagram 5) Cable (GT10-C02H-6PT9P) D-Sub 9-pin side Second GOT side RS(RTS) 7 8 CS(CTS) CS(CTS) 8 7 RS(RTS) N.C.
PAGE 616
20.3.2 RS-422 cable  Precautions when preparing a cable  Connection diagram (1) Cable length The length of the RS-422 cable must be 30m or less. RS422 connection diagram 1) (2) GOT side connector GOT side GOT side SDA 1 2 RDA RDA 2 1 SDA RSA 3 4 CSA CSA 4 3 RSA SG 5 5 SG SDB 6 7 RDB RDB 7 6 SDB RSB 8 9 CSB CSB 9 8 RSB For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. 1.4.
PAGE 617
4. This section explains with an example of the following system configuration. RS-232 cable 1st GOT GT11 RS-422 cable 2nd GOT GT11  Setting for the first GOT The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Make the settings according to the usage environment. 20.4.2 Communication detail settings Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. (2) Settings of communication interface connecting to the second GOT 2.
PAGE 618
(3) [Transparent] setting (GT14 only)  Setting for the second GOT Set the communication interface connecting to the first GOT. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. Select [Common] [Environment Setup] [GOT Setup], check [Enable GOT Setup], and select the [Transparent] menu. After [Controller CH No.] is displayed, check the channel No. connected to the target PLC of multiple GOTs. For details of connectable models, refer to the following. 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7.
PAGE 619
20.4.2 Communication detail settings 17 (2) MELSEC-FX (a) For the GT14, GT12, GT11 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION Make the settings according to the usage environment. (1) A/QnA/L/Q CPU, LJ71C24, QJ71C24 CNC CONNECTION 18 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. (Default: 0time) 0 to 5times Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out.
PAGE 620
(3) QnA/L/Q CPU (GT10) Item Transmission Speed Description Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 115200bps) When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment.
PAGE 621
 GOT's communication timing  Using the FA transparent function When multiple GOTs are connected, the FA transparent function is not available even if the RS-232 interface or USB interface is used for the connection. 2nd GOT PC PC 19 • If the first GOT is turned on after a while the second GOT is turned on, because the communication start of the second GOT is delayed, a communication error may be detected at the second GOT.
PAGE 622
20 - 12 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.
PAGE 623
MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 624
PAGE 625
MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 4 21.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 7 21.4 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 41 21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 42 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21.1 What is Multi-channel Function? . . . .
PAGE 626
21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.1 What is Multi-channel Function? Multi-channel Function is a function to monitor up to four FA controllers (PLC CPU, temperature controller, inverter, etc.) on one GOT by writing multiple communication drivers in the GOT. (For GT155 , up to two controllers (two channels)) Installing multiple communication drivers Channel No.1 Bus connection Channel No.2 OMRON PLC connection Channel No.3 Temperature controller connection Monitoring the devices of FA controllers Channel No.
PAGE 627
(1) With a single unit of GOT, the system consisting of PLC CPU, temperature controller, servo amplifier and other controllers can be configured. PLC system Servo amplifier system 19 (2) Controlling FXCPU/third party PLC, etc. through the network (MELSECNET/H, etc.) It is possible to control FXCPU/third party PLC, etc. through the network (MELSECNET/H, etc.).
PAGE 628
21.2 System Configuration 21.2.1 Bus connection and serial connection One GOT can monitor a PLC CPU, temperature controller and servo amplifier, etc. Therefore, the system configuration, in which several controllers are mixed, can be easily established. In addition, each system can be monitored on the GOT screen, and the unified management of the information is possible.
PAGE 629
17 Controllers that use Channels No.5 to 8 The following shows the drivers that can be set to Channels No. 5 to 8. For the system configuration and connection condition with the controller, refer to the chapter of each controller.
PAGE 630
21.2.2 Ethernet multiple connection One GOT can make several Ethernet connections and the bus or network connections. Therefore, the system configuration, in which several networks are linked, can be established. Communication driver MELSECNET/H Communication driver Communication driver Ethernet/IP(AB)/ Gateway MELSEC-FX FXCPU Connection cable Direct CPU connection (Channel No.1) QCPU Connection cable MELSECNET/H connection (Channel No.
PAGE 631
17 Basics of interface selection This section explains basic knowledge of the multi-channel function. A general flow of operation from system selection for the multi-channel function to drawing is explained in 21.3.2 to 21.3.6. It is recommended to refer to 21.3.2 to 21.3.6 when making necessary settings using the multi-channel function for the first time.  Multi-channel function specifications How the units are installed and the multi-channel function specifications are described below.
PAGE 632
(2) Specifications Specifications Item GT1695 GT1685 GT1675 GT1672 GT1665 GT1662 GT1655 GT1595 GT1585 GT157 GT155 GT14 Description GT12 GT156 GT16 • In bus connection and network connection (*1), only 1 channel can be set for one GOT. • For the Ethernet connection (*2), up to 4 channels can be set. • When the Ethernet interface built in the GOT is used for connection other than communication with a controller (*3), the connection is not included in the count of the number of channels.
PAGE 633
ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION User's Manual of GOT used. 17 CNC CONNECTION 18 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION *7 GT16M-V4, GT15V-75V4, GT16M-R2, GT15V-75R1, GT16M-V4R1, GT15V-75V4R1, GT16M-ROUT, GT15V-75ROUT, GT16MMMR GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z, GT15-75J61BT13-Z Usable units differ depending on the GOT.
PAGE 634
 Calculating consumed current For using multiple extension units, a bar code reader, or a RFID controller, the total current for the extension units, bar code reader, or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply. For the current that the GOT can supply and the current for the extension units, bar code reader, or RFID controller, refer to the below tables.
PAGE 635
(a) When connecting the GT15-J71BR13, GT15-RS4-9S (3 units), GT15-J71E71-100 (for the gateway function) and a bar code reader (0.12 A) to the GT1575-V Total consumed current (A) 2.2 0.77+0.33+0.33+0.33+0.224+0.12=2.104 Since the calculated value is within the capacity of the GOT, they can be connected to the GOT. 18 (b) When connecting the GT15-J71BR13, GT15-RS4-9S (2 units), GT15-J71E71-100 (for the gateway function) and a bar code reader (0.
PAGE 636
21.3.2 General flow from system selection to drawing System selection for using the multi-channel function is explained below. Make selection and setting for the multi-channel function by following the order shown below. System selection Determine the connection type and the channel No. to be used. Interface selection Determine the GOT side interface and communication units to 21.3.3 Determining the connection type and channel No. (System selection) 21.3.
PAGE 637
17 Determining the connection type and channel No. (System selection) ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION  Determining the connection type (1) GT16 For GT16, the combinations of the bus or network connection, the Ethernet connection, and the serial connection are available as shown in the following table. Ethernet connection 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) 10.
PAGE 638
Connection type Direct CPU connection 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Computer link connection 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION CC-Link connection (via G4) 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Inverter connection 15. INVERTER CONNECTION Servo amplifier connection 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION CNC connection (serial connection) 18.2.1 Direct connection to CPU GOT Multi- Drop Connection 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Third party PLC connection (serial connection) Non-Mitsubishi Products 1 • 4.
PAGE 639
The following shows the applicable combinations of connection types, the number of channels, and restricted functions. FA transparent function RS-232 (a) • Bus/network connection: 1 channel • Serial connection: 1 to 3 channels Max. 4 channels *2 (b) • Bus/network connection: 1 channel • Ethernet connection: 1 to 3 channels Max. 4 channels *2 (c) • Ethernet connection: 1 to 3 channels • Serial connection: 1 to 3 channels Max.
PAGE 640
(2) GT15 For GT15, the combinations of the bus, network, or Ethernet connection and the serial connection are available as shown in the following table. Connection type Bus connection Bus/network/Ethernet connection Reference 5. BUS CONNECTION Ethernet connection 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) 10.
PAGE 641
17 Inverter connection 15. INVERTER CONNECTION Servo amplifier connection 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION CNC connection (serial connection) 18.2.1 Direct connection to CPU GOT Multi- Drop Connection 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Third party PLC connection (serial connection) Non-Mitsubishi Products 1 • 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection • 6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC • 7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC • 8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC • 9. CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC • 12.
PAGE 642
The number of channels and the functions that can be used differ depending on the GOT to be used. The table below shows the allowable combinations of connection types, the number of channels and restricted functions.
PAGE 643
Non-Mitsubishi Products 2 • 13. CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER Third party robot controller connection Non-Mitsubishi Products 1 • 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER Non-Mitsubishi Products 2 • 15. CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER Third party temperature controller connection Non-Mitsubishi Products 1 • 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT • 5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER • 10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER • 11.
PAGE 644
(4) GT12 For GT12, the combinations of the Ethernet connection and the serial connection are available as shown in the following table Connection type Ethernet connection 8.ETHERNET CONNECTION CNC connection (Ethernet connection) 18.2.4Ethernet connection Third party PLC connection (Ethernet connection) Non-Mitsubishi Products 1 • 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4.3 Ethernet Connection Non-Mitsubishi Products 2 • 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6.3 Ethernet Connection • 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7.
PAGE 645
Allowable combination of connection types GOT to be used Functions that are restricted by the connection type*1*2 GT1275 GT1265 FA transparent function RS-232 (a) • Ethernet connection: 1 channel • Serial connection: 1 channel Max. 2 channels *3 (b) • Serial connection: 2 channels Max. 2 channels *3 *1 18 USB When the functions below are used, the connectable number of channels may be restricted depending on the combination of the functions to be used.
PAGE 646
 Determining the channel No. (1) Channel No. of PLC, motion controller, temperature controller, inverter, servo amplifier, CNC, robot controller After determining the connection type to be used, determine the channel Nos. (CH No. 1 to CH No. 4) to be used for the respective connection types. There are no special cautions to be attended to for determining channel Nos. Set the channel No. by selecting [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu. 1.1.
PAGE 647
To use the multi-channel function, add interfaces to the GOT with the following methods if required. (1) GT16 • Install communication units on the extension interfaces. • Use communication units installed on the extension interfaces with the RS-232 interface, the RS422/485 interface, and/or the Ethernet interface built in the GOT. Extension interface 2 3rd stage Extension interface allows the installation of a communication unit up to the 3rd stage, respectively.
PAGE 648
(2) GT15 • Install communication units on the extension interfaces. • Use communication units installed on the extension interfaces with the RS-232 interface built in the GOT. Extension interface 1 Extension interface 2 3rd stage 2nd stage Extension interface allows the installation of a communication unit up to the 3rd stage, respectively. (For the GT155 , only one extension interface can be installed.) A communication unit installed at the 4th or higher stage cannot be used.
PAGE 649
For the connection via the connection type selected in 21.3.3, select interfaces and communication units to be used. Select the interfaces and communication units according to the connection type by referring to the following.
PAGE 650
 GOT interface used for bus connection For the bus connection, use the following communication units. Model*1 Interface GT15-75QBUS(2)L, GT15-ABUS(2) Bus connection unit *1 GT15-75ABUS(2)L, GT15-QBUS(2), To mount multiple units, the GT15-QBUS(2) or GT15-ABUS(2) is required. POINT (1) Bus connection units to be used GT15-QBUS(2) and GT15-ABUS(2) can be used independent of the number of serial connection channels.
PAGE 651
17  GOT interface used for Ethernet connection ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION For the Ethernet connection, use the following interface built in the GOT and communication unit. (1) GT16 Interface 18 CNC CONNECTION Up to four channels can be used. (2) GT15 Ethernet communication unit Model GT15-J71E71-100 (3) GT14 Interface built in GOT *1 19 Name GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Interface Ethernet interface*1 Up to two channels can be used.
PAGE 652
(2) GT15 Interface Name/model Interface built in GOT RS-232 interface*1*2 Serial communication module GT15-RS2-9P, *1 *2 GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE The operator authentication (external authentication or fingerprint authentication) or the FA transparent function (RS-232 communication) uses the RS-232 interface built in the GOT. For the RS-422 communication using the RS-232 interface built in the GOT, the RS-422 conversion unit is required. (For GT155 , the RS-422 conversion unit is not applicable.
PAGE 653
A video input unit, an RGB input unit, a video/RGB input unit, an RGB output unit or a multimedia unit is required corresponding to the function to be used. Each type of unit uses 1 stage (2 slots) of extension interface. 18 CNC CONNECTION Only one piece of each type of unit can be installed on a GOT. The CF card unit or CF card extension unit is required. The CF card unit or CF card extension unit uses one stage (one slot) of an extension interface.
PAGE 654
(2) Combinations of units that affect the number of available channels The following are examples of unit combinations that affect the number of available channels. POINT Installing a unit on another unit (Checking the unit installation position) For details on the precautions for installing units on another unit, refer to the following. 1.3.
PAGE 655
17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION Example 2) To add the serial connection (1 channel) to the system using the bus connection (unit occupying 2 slots: 1 channel), the serial connection (2 channels), the video display, and the barcode function Serial communication Serial communication unit unit Bus connection unit Video input unit Barcode reader 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Since there are no available areas left for installing a unit, serial connection can be used for up to 2 channels.
PAGE 656
Write down the following items selected in this section to the check sheet. Selection of interface (communication unit) Write down the name of interface and the model name of communication unit to be used Write Check Sheet for each of the connection type. 21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet (Continued to next page) 21 - 32 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.
PAGE 657
17 Write down the following items to the check sheet. 1. 21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet Write down the name of communication unit to be used for each of the connection type. CNC CONNECTION 18 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20 21 * For the GT155 , setting is made only for Extension interface 1.
PAGE 658
3. After writing down CH No., write down the communication driver name for each connection type. For the communication drivers used for the respective connection types, refer to the following. Chapters of each respective connection type * For the GT155 , setting is made only for Extension interface 1. 21 - 34 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.
PAGE 659
17 Setting for communication settings Make communication settings based on the interface and the installation position of the respective communication units. Extend interface 1 Extend interface 2 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 21.3.
PAGE 660
Example: Setting example for "Bus connection (1 channel) + Serial connection (3 channels) + Bar code reader" (In the case of the GT157 ) 3 Serial communication unit (GT15-RS2-9P) OMRON temperature controller connection 2 Serial communication unit (GT15-RS2-9P) FXCPU direction CPU connection 4 1 Bus connection unit (GT15-QBUS2) Serial communication unit (GT15-RS4-9P) Inverter connection QCPU bus connection 5 Bar code reader 5 1 2 3 4 21 - 36 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.
PAGE 661
17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION Example: Setting example for "MELSECNET/H connection (1 channel) + Serial connection (1 channel)" (In the case of the GT155 ) Serial communication unit (GT15-RS2-9P) FXCPU direction CPU connection MELSECNET/H communication unit (GT15-J71LP23-25) CNC CONNECTION 18 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.
PAGE 662
Example: Setting example for Ethernet connection (4 channels) (In the case of the GT1685) Ethernet interface built in the GOT QCPU Ethernet connection YOKOGAWA PLC Ethernet connection YASKAWA PLC Ethernet connection MODBUS /TCP connection 21 - 38 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.
PAGE 663
21.3.6 17 Items to be checked before starting drawing ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION The following describes that should be understood before starting drawing and the functions that should be set beforehand when using the multi-channel function.  Device settings It is necessary to set the device to be used together with the CH No. 18 Screen Design Manual CNC CONNECTION GT Designer3 Version GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 Click the device setting button. Click the controller to be set.
PAGE 664
 Clock function Set the controller for which adjust/broadcast should be executed by the CH No. GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual 10:10 10:10 CH No. 1 Mitsubishi PLC M TS IUBISHI CH No. 2 Servo amplifier C H ARGE 10:10 CH No. 3 OMRON PLC Broadcast is executed for CH No. 1 and CH No. 3. CH No. 4 Temperature controller  FA transparent function Set the controller for which the FA transparent function should be executed by the CH No. 22.5.1 Setting communication interface The set CH No.
PAGE 665
17 Precautions for hardware To use the multi-channel function, an option function board is required according to the GOT. The following shows required option function boards according to the GOT.
PAGE 666
21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet This section provides the check sheet to be used for Communication Settings when the multi-channel function is used. Sections 21.3.3 to 21.3.5 contain explanations of the items to be checked on the check sheet. Checking items explained in these sections using the check sheet on the following page allows you to complete the setting for the multi-channel function. Enter the selections having been made in the steps above to the check sheet.
PAGE 667
(1) Channel No. of PLC, motion controller CPU, temperature controller, inverter, servo amplifier, CNC, robot controller (No.1 to No.4) 2 3 4 ( Selection of interface (communication unit) 21.3.3) ( 21.3.4) Connection name Connection name Connection name Connection name 19 (2) Channel No. of fingerprint unit, barcode reader, RFID controller, personal computer, serial printer (No.5 to No.8) 7 8 21.3.3) ( 21.3.
PAGE 668
 Check sheet No. 2 (selection of GOT side interface) Attaching the communication unit ( 1.3.7) (1) GT16 Extension interface 1 Extension interface 2 3rd stage Com. unit name CH No. Driver name 3rd stage Com. unit name CH No. (1) Driver name (4) 2rd stage Com. unit name CH No. Driver name 2rd stage Com. unit name CH No. (2) Driver name (5) 1rd stage Com. unit name CH No. Driver name 1rd stage Com. unit name CH No.
PAGE 669
17 Extension interface 1 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION (2) GT15 Extension interface 2 3rd stage Com. unit name CH No. Driver name 3rd stage Com. unit name (1) CH No. Driver name CH No. Driver name CH No. Driver name (4) 18 2nd stage CH No. Driver name 2nd stage Com. unit name (2) CNC CONNECTION Com. unit name (5) 1st stage Com. unit name CH No. Driver name 1st stage Com. unit name (3) (6) (only one connection) Connecting a controller Com. unit name (7) CH No.
PAGE 670
21 - 46 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.
PAGE 671
FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 672
PAGE 673
ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 22 17 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22. 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 - 11 22.4 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 26 22.5 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 36 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 39 22.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 674
22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.1 FA Transparent Function The FA transparent function allows the sequence programs of the Mitsubishi PLC to be read, written and monitored from a personal computer connected via a GOT. A 1254 A 1254 B 348 B 348 Bus connection cable RS-232/RS-422 cable Ethernet connection cable RS-232 cable USB cable Ethernet connection cable Sequence program can be read, written, monitored, etc. 22.
PAGE 675
17  Connecting the GOT and personal computer with RS-232 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION (1) When connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs.
PAGE 676
(2) When connecting the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs.
PAGE 677
17 (3) When connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION Software MELSOFT Navigator*4 GX Developer*1 GX Works2*5 PX Developer*2 MX Sheet*10 MELSOFT Navigator*8 GX Developer*6 LCPU GX Works2*7 GX LogViewer MX Component*9, MX Sheet*10, Motion controller CPU (Q Series) MX Component*12, MX Sheet*13 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 *10 *11 *12 *13 LCPU Logging Configuration Tool*11 GX Developer Version 8.
PAGE 678
 Connecting the GOT and personal computer with USB (1) When connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs.
PAGE 679
17 (2) When connecting the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs.
PAGE 680
(3) When connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs.
PAGE 681
(1) When connecting the GOT and PLC in Bus connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. PLC CPU Motion controller CPU (Q series) MELSERVO(MR-J3-B) *5 MELSERVO(MR-J4-B) *5 MX MX Sheet*3, Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module*8 18 MT Works2*4 MR Configurator2 *6 MR Configurator2*7 GX Works2 Version 1.48A or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MX Component Version 3.15R or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
PAGE 682
(3) When connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. PLC CPU GX Developer*1 QCPU (Q mode) *1 *2 Software GX Works2 *2 GX Developer Version 8.78G or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Works2 Version 1.16S or later is required to use the FA transparent function. (4) When connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs.
PAGE 683
17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored  When connecting the GOT and personal computer with serial or USB Connection type Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software *2 Q00JCPU 18 CNC CONNECTION The following models support FA transparent function.
PAGE 684
Connection type Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software *3 Q12DCCPU-V C Controller module Q24DHCCPU-V Q24DHCCPU-V GX Developer GX Works2 MX Component MX Sheet Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller *2 *1 *1 *1 *2 *2 module*5 MELSEC-QS MELSEC-L MELSEC-Q (A mode) MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) QS001CPU - L02CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A Q06HCPU-A Q2ACPU Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU GX Dev
PAGE 685
Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software *3 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 Connection type 18 CNC CONNECTION A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A2SCPU*1 A2SCPU-S1 19 GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION A1SHCPU MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 GX Developer
PAGE 686
Connection type Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software *1 A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3 A171SCPU Motion controller CPU (A Series) A171SCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3N GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet *2 A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FX2, FX2C, FX1S, FX1N, FX2N, FX1NC, FX2NC GX Developer GX Works2 MX Component MX Sheet GX Developer FX Configurator-FP M
PAGE 687
Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software *4 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 Connection type 18 CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module CNC Robot controller CNC CONNECTION QJ72LP25G - QJ72BR15 LJ72GF15-T2 - 19 NZ2GF-ETB GX Works2 CNC C70 (Q173NCCPU) GX Developer NC Configurator MELDAS C6/C64 GX Developer CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) RT ToolBox2 *1 *1 *3 *3 *2 20 CRnD-700 FREQROL-A500/A500L FREQROL-F500
PAGE 688
 When connecting the GOT and PC with Ethernet Connection type Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection *2 Target software Ethernet connection *2 *2 Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU *3 *3 Q12HCPU *3 Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU (Main base) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) Q25PRHCPU (Extension base) Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU MELSEC-Q (Q mode) GX Works2 MX Component MX Sheet Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU *3 Q04UDHC
PAGE 689
Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software *1 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 Connection type Q12DCCPU-V C controller module Q24DHCCPU-V Q24DHCCPU-V MELSEC-QS QS001CPU CNC CONNECTION 18 Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module *2 - 19 L02CPU MELSEC-L L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P GX Works2 MX Component MX Sheet *2 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION L26CPU *2 L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU 20 Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A - MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12
PAGE 690
Connection type Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software *1 A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU-S1 MELSEC-A (AnCPU) A2NCPUP21-S1 A2NCPUR21-S1 - A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21 A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) A2SCPU - A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 - A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 - A2CCPUC24-PRF A2C
PAGE 691
Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software *1 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 Connection type 18 CNC CONNECTION Q172DCPU Q173DCPU Q172DCPU-S1 Motion controller CPU (Q Series) Q173DCPU-S1 MT Works2 *2 *3 *2*3 Q172DSCPU 19 Q173DSCPU *2 *2 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Q170MCPU MT Works2 GX Developer GX Works2 A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 20 A373UCPU MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION A373UCPU-S3
PAGE 692
Connection type Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software *1 MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station CC-Link IE Field Network head module CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module CNC QJ72LP25-25 QJ72LP25G - QJ72BR15 LJ72GF15-T2 - NZ2GF-ETB - CNC C70 (Q173NCCPU) - MELDAS C6/C64 Robot controller CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) - CRnD-700 FREQROL-A500/A500L FREQROL-F500/F500L FREQROL-V500/V500L FREQROL-E500 FREQROL FREQROL-S500
PAGE 693
Connection type Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software 18 CNC CONNECTION *2 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17  When connecting the GOT and personal computer with modem Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU 19 Q02HCPU GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU 20 Q25PHCPU MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Q12PRHCPU (Main base) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q12PRHCPU (Extension base
PAGE 694
Connection type Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software *1 Q12DCCPU-V C Controller module Q24DHCCPU-V MELSEC-QS QS001CPU - L02CPU L26CPU MELSEC-L L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P - L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU MELSEC-Q (A mode) Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A - Q06HCPU-A Q2ACPU MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU - Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU Q2ASCPU MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU) Q2ASCPU-S1 Q2ASHCPU - Q2ASHCPU-S1 A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2A
PAGE 695
Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 19 A2SCPU*1 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION A1SHCPU MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) - A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24 21 A2CCPU A2CCPUP21 - MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION MELSEC-A A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3
PAGE 696
Connection type Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software *1 A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3 A171SCPU Motion controller CPU (A Series) A171SCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3N - A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 FX0 FX0S FX0N FX1 FX2 FX2C FX1S MELSEC-FX FX1N GX Developer FX2N FX1NC FX2NC FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU0 WS0-CPU1 - (Continued to next page) *1 22 - 24 GT14 mo
PAGE 697
Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software CC-Link IE Field Network head module CNC QJ72LP25-25 QJ72LP25G - QJ72BR15 LJ72GF15-T2 - CNC C70 (Q173NCCPU) - 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station MELDAS C6/C64 Robot controller CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) - CRnD-700 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION FREQROL-A500/A500L FREQROL-F500/F500L FREQROL-V500/V500L FREQROL-E500 FREQROL FREQROL-
PAGE 698
22.4 System Configuration 22.4.1 GX Developer, GX Works2, GX LogViewer, MX Component, MX Sheet, LCPU Logging Configuration Tool, Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module  When connecting the GOT and personal computer with serial or USB PC GOT PLC Connection cable Communication driver Connection type dependant Varies according to the connection type. PLC GOT Connection type Model For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following.
PAGE 699
Communication driver PC GOT PLC Connection type dependant Connection cable ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17  When connecting the GOT and PC with Ethernet (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12) Personal computer Connection type Model Interface Cable model length*3 Software For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following.
PAGE 700
 When connecting the GOT and personal computer with modem Communication driver Connection type dependant Modem GOT PLC Adapter cable Connection cable Modem Phone line PC Connection cable Varies according to the connection type. PLC GOT Connection type Model For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following.
PAGE 701
17 PX Developer, GX Configurator ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 22.4.2 PC GOT Communication driver Connection cable Connection type dependant PLC Connection type For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. GOT Model Personal computer Connection cable Interface Cable model Max.
PAGE 702
22.4.3 MT Developer, MT Works2  When connecting the GOT and personal computer with serial or USB QCPU + Motion controller CPU (Q series) PC GOT Connection cable Communication driver Connection type dependant Varies according to the connection type. PLC GOT Connection type Model For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following.
PAGE 703
Communication driver PC GOT PLC Connection type dependant Connection cable ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17  When connecting the GOT and PC with Ethernet (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12) Model For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following.
PAGE 704
22.4.4 MR Configurator, MR Configurator2 Communication driver Connection type dependant  When connecting the GOT and personal computer with serial or USB Servo amplifier QCPU + Motion controller CPU (Q series) Servo amplifier PC GOT Connection cable Communication driver Connection type dependant Varies according to the connection type. SSCNET , SSCNET PLC /H GOT Connection type Model For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following.
PAGE 705
17 Servo amplifier QCPU + Motion controller CPU (Q series) Servo amplifier ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION  When connecting the GOT and PC with Ethernet (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12) PC GOT Connection cable Connection type Model For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following.
PAGE 706
22.4.5 FR Configurator Communication driver FREQROL 500/700 Inverter Inverter PC GOT Connection cable Varies according to the connection type. Inverter GOT Connection type Model For details on the system configuration between GOT and Mitsubishi inverter, refer to the following. Interface Cable model Max. distance RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) 3m Number of connectable equipment Software FR Configurator GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m) USB INVERTER CONNECTION 22.4.
PAGE 707
17 RT ToolBox2 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 22.4.7 PC Communication driver Connection type dependant 19 Varies according to the connection type. PLC GOT Connection type Model For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Personal computer Connection cable Interface Cable model Max.
PAGE 708
22.5 GOT Side Settings 22.5.1 Setting communication interface  Communication setting with personal computer  Controller setting Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer. Set the channel of the connected equipment. For details of the setting contents, refer to the following manual. 2. Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 7.1.2 Interface setting of the GOT Example: For GT16 3. 4. Click! 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select [Common] menu.
PAGE 709
Set the IP address of the GOT. (Default: 192.168.3.18) IP Label Set the IP Label of detail setting. Subnet Mask*1 Set the subnet mask for the sub network. (Only for connection via router) If the sub network is not used, the default value is set. (Default: 255.255.255.0) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Set the router address of the default gateway where the GOT is connected. (Only for connection via router) (Default: 0.0.0.0) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Set the GOT port No. for Ethernet download.
PAGE 710
 GOT Setup When using the multi-channel function (only GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12), specify the channel No. on which FA transparent function is executed. 2. 3. 4. Click! 1. Select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [GOT Setup] from the menu. 2. Check [Enable GOT Setup]. 3. Select the [Transparent] tab. 4. As necessary, check one of [CH1] to [CH4]. (Default: CH1) < GT16,GT15 > [CH1], [CH2], [CH3], [CH4] < GT14,GT12 > [CH1], [CH2] Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.
PAGE 711
17 22.6.1 Accessing the PLC by the GX Developer, PX Developer, GX Configurator ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting (For bus connection) 18 CNC CONNECTION The setting method for the FA transparent function of GX Developer is used as an example. GX Configurator is an add-on software of GX Developer. (Except for GX Configurator-QP)  Connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection or direct CPU connection (when connecting to QCPU (Q mode)) 7.
PAGE 712
 Connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection(when connected to the QJ71C24(N)) (GX Configurator is not supported.) 6. 7. 1. Click [Online] 2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed. 3. 5. Check-mark either of the following in [PC side I/F Serial setting]. When connecting the GOT and PC with serial When connecting the GOT to PC via modem [Transfer Setup] in GX Developer. Mark the [RS-232C] checkbox.
PAGE 713
17  When connecting the GOT and PLC in ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION Ethernet communication (when connecting to QCPU (Q mode)) CNC CONNECTION 18 1. Click [Online] 2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed. 7. On the [PLC side I/F Detailed setting of PLC module], mark the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox and click [Set].
PAGE 714
5. Check-mark either of the following in [PC side I/F Serial setting]. When connecting the GOT and PC with serial When connecting the GOT to PC via modem Mark the [RS-232C] checkbox. When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Mark the [USB] checkbox. 12.The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Developer has been connected to the QCPU (Q mode).  Connecting the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection (when connecting to FXCPU) 6.
PAGE 715
17 Accessing by GX Works2 The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of GX Works2. (For bus connection) ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 22.6.2  When connecting the GOT and personal computer with serial or USB 18 CNC CONNECTION (1) Connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection or direct CPU connection (when connecting to QCPU (Q mode)) 7. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].
PAGE 716
(2) Connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection (when connecting to QJ71C24 (N)) 6. 1. 2. 3. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2. 7. 5. Check-mark [C24] in [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. The [Transfer Setup Connection1] is displayed. Set the [Transfer Setup Connection1]: PC side I/F : Serial USB PLC side I/F : GOT Other Station Setting : No Specification 8. 4.
PAGE 717
17 (3) Connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet connection ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION (a) Connecting to QCPU (Q mode) CNC CONNECTION 18 6. 2. 3. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2. 7. On the [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT], mark the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox and click [Setting...]. The [Transfer Setup Connection1] is displayed.
PAGE 718
10.Specify the number for [Network No.] and [Station No.] same as the number assigned to the Ethernet module. When [QnUDE(H)] is set for [PLC type], the setting is not required. 11. Specify the IP address for [IP Address] same as the IP address assigned to the built-in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet module. 4. 5. Double-click [Serial USB] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial Setting]. Check-mark either of the following in [PC side I/F Serial Setting].
PAGE 719
POINT IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Input Format 18 DEC. Version of GX Works2 GX Works2 Version 1.34L or later is required to execute the FA transparent function with using Ethernet adapter (NZ2GF-ETB). 8. 9. By clicking [Set], the [GOT (Ethernet) transparent setting] is displayed. Here, set the [FX3U-ENET-ADP] or [Ethernet Module], which is connected via a GOT. (Use default value for settings other than the following.) :3 Network No. PC No. :1 :192.168.3.18 IP address :5001 Port No.
PAGE 720
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2. 6. The [Transfer Setup Connection1] is displayed. 7. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. Set the [CPU mode] to [LCPU]. Set the [Transfer Setup Connection1]. PC side I/F : Serial USB PLC side I/F : GOT Double-click [Serial USB] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial Setting].
PAGE 721
ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 CNC CONNECTION 18 9. [GOT (Ethernet) Transparent Setting] is displayed. Here, set the Ethernet module, which is firstly connected via a GOT. 10. Set [NZ2GF-ETB] for [PLC Type]. 13. The [Transfer Setup Connection1] is displayed. 14. Click [Other station (Single network)]. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21 11.
PAGE 722
 When connecting the GOT and personal computer in Ethernet connection (GT16, GT15 and GT14 only) (1) Connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection or direct CPU connection (when connecting to QCPU (Q mode)) 16.Network Communication Route Detailed Setting of CC IE Field is displayed. 17.Set [Network No.] and [Station No.] assigned to CPU, and click [OK]. When connecting to CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module of the system configuration example, the setting is as follows. [Network No.
PAGE 723
(2) Connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection (when connecting to QJ71C24 (N)) ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION (For bus connection) 17 CNC CONNECTION 18 7. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Set the IP address and port No. to the same as the Ethernet download setting. 2. 3. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed.
PAGE 724
22.6.3 Accessing by GX LogViewer The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of GX LogViewer. 6. 7. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Set the IP address and port No. to the same as the Ethernet download setting. 1. 2. Click [Show Assistant Dialog] for [View] on GX LogViewer. The [Assistant] dialog box is displayed. 22.5.
PAGE 725
17 Accessing PLC by GX Configurator-QP ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 22.6.4 The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of GX Configurator-QP. Bus connection Interface: PLC Type: Bus The [Connection setup] is displayed. Set the [PC side] in [Connection setup]. Direct CPU connection Interface: (RS-232C) COM setting: COM1 to COM10 Transmission speed: 9.6kbps to 115.
PAGE 726
22.6.5 Accessing by the MT Developer This section explains the procedure to set the FA transparent function of MT Developer with an example of connecting to motion controller CPU (Q series). 4. Check-mark either of the following in [PLC side I/F setting of PLC module]. Bus connection 1. Click [Communication] MT Developer. [via GOT(Bus) transparent mode] [Communication Setting] in Direct CPU connection [via GOT(direct coupled) transparent mode] 5. 6. 2.
PAGE 727
22.6.6 17 Accessing by the MT Works2 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION This section explains the procedure to set the FA transparent function of MT Works2 with an example of connecting to motion controller CPU (Q series).  When connecting the GOT and personal computer with serial or USB 18 CNC CONNECTION (1) Connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection or direct CPU connection GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 1. 2. 3.
PAGE 728
(2) When connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet communication 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of MT Works2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed. 6. 7. Set the [Transfer Setup]: PC side I/F : Serial USB PLC side I/F : GOT Other Station Setting : No Specification: Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].
PAGE 729
computer in Ethernet connection (GT16, GT15 and GT14 only) 10. Specify the number for [Network No.] and [Station No.] same as the number assigned to the Ethernet module. When [QnUDE(H)] is set for [Type name], the setting is not required. (1) Connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection or direct CPU connection 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION  When connecting the GOT and personal 18 CNC CONNECTION 11.
PAGE 730
22.6.7 (For bus connection) Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator Make the FA transparent settings with the of MT Developer. For details, refer to the following: 22.6.5 Accessing by the MT Developer 22.6.8 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator2 Make the FA transparent settings with the of MT Works2. For details, refer to the following: 22.6.6 Accessing by the MT Works2 22.6.9 6. 7. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].
PAGE 731
17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 22.6.10 Accessing PLC by FX Configurator-FP This section explains the procedure to set the FA transparent function of FX Configurator-FP with an example of connecting to FXCPU. 2. CNC CONNECTION 18 Check-mark either of the following in [Communication Port]. When connecting the GOT and PC with serial 19 Mark the [RS-232C] checkbox. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Mark the [USB] checkbox. 3. Click the [GOT Transparent Communication].
PAGE 732
22.6.11 Accessing by FX ConfiguratorEN This section explains the procedure to set the FA transparent function of the FX Configurator-EN. 5. 1. 2. 3. Click [Transfer setup] on the FX Configurator-EN. Mark the [Serial port/USB] checkbox in [Connecting interface]. Check-mark either of the following in [Serial port/ USB] of [Connecting interface]. When connecting the GOT and PC with serial Mark the [RS-232C (include FX-USB-AW/FX3U-USBBD)] checkbox.
PAGE 733
17 22.6.12 Accessing by RT ToolBox2 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION This section explains the procedure to set the FA transparent function of RT ToolBox2 with an example of connecting to CRnQ-700.  Connecting the GOT and Controller in bus connection or direct CPU connection (CRnQ700) CNC CONNECTION 18 Check-mark either of the following in [Serial port]. When connecting the GOT and PC with serial Mark the [RS-232C] checkbox. When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Mark the [USB] checkbox. 5.
PAGE 734
 Connecting the GOT and Controller in Ethernet connection 1. Right-click a project name to be a target on the project tree of RT ToolBox2. Click [Edit Project]. 2. Set [Method] to [CRnQ]. 3. Click [Detail]. 6. 7. 8. 9. On the [PLC side I/F setting of PLC module], mark the [via GOT (Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox and click [Set]. Set [QJ71E71] for [Type]. Specify the number assigned to the Ethernet module for [Network No.], [Station No.] and [IP Address] in "Module side".
PAGE 735
The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of NC Configurator. 22.6.14 Accessing by MELSOFT Navigator This section explains the procedure to set the FA transparent function of the MELSOFT Navigator. 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 22.6.13 Accessing by NC Configurator 1. 1. 2. Click [File] [Batch Read] in MELSOFT The [Batch Read] is displayed. 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 2. Click [Online] Navigator. CNC CONNECTION 18 [Open]. The [Open] is displayed.
PAGE 736
22.6.15 Accessing by LCPU Logging Configuration Tool The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of LCPU Logging Configuration Tool . 22.6.16 Accessing by Setting/ Monitoring tool for C Controller module The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module with the C Controller module (Q24DHCCPU-V) connected.
PAGE 737
4. 6. Mark the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox on the [CPU side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT] screen. 18 CNC CONNECTION 5. Double-click [GOT] of the CPU side I/F to display [CPU side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module has been connected to the motion controller (Q mode).
PAGE 738
 When connecting the GOT and personal computer in Ethernet connection (GT16, GT15, and GT14 only) (1) When connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection 6. 7. 1. 2. 3. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of MT Setting/ Monitoring tool for C Controller module. 5. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Set the IP address and port No.
PAGE 739
17 When performing the FA transparent function, use either RS-232 interface or USB interface of the GOT. Using both of them to perform the FA transparent function concurrently is not allowed. RS-232  Software available for the FA transparent function When multiple kinds of software are activated on one personal computer, only one of them is available for communications using the FA transparent function. Do not concurrently perform any communications using the FA transparent function.
PAGE 740
(2) When the FA transparent function is used in a bus connection When the FA transparent function is used in a bus connection, the following GX Developer functions or GX Works2 functions cannot be executed.  When the FA transparent function is used in an Ethernet connection (1) GX Developer function or GX Works2 function When the FA transparent function is used in an Ethernet connection, the following GX Developer functions or GX Works2 functions cannot be executed.
PAGE 741
When using FA transparent function in GOT multi-drop connection, the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver to the GOT from GT Designer3 (Version 1.18U or later), as well as the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver to the serial multi-drop connection unit are required.  When connecting the GOT and PC with RS232 The [Transmission speed] setting in [PC side I/F Serial setting] in GX Developer or GX Works2 must be within the range supported by the connected CPU.
PAGE 742
 When performing [Read to PLC], [Write to PLC] and other file operations on GX Developer, GX Works2 If any of the following GOT functions is executed during the file operation such as [Read to PLC] or [Write to PLC], an error may occur on the GOT, GX Developer, or GX Works2. In this case, take the following corrective action: • File reading in the ladder monitor function for MELSEC-Q Error messages on GOT Corrective action on GOT side The file is not found.
PAGE 743
― With no file writing being executed on ladder edit, execute the file operation.  When PLC write is failed while using the FA transparent function The execution of PLC write using the FA transparent function may be failed due to some reason such as cable disconnection. When this occurs, re-execute the PLC write from the same personal computer, or reset the PLC CPU.
PAGE 744
22.7.4 When using MR Configurator, MR Configurator2  Unavailable functions and restrictions For the use via the motion controller, there are unavailable functions and restrictions. For details on the restrictions, refer to the help screen of MR Configurator.  Monitor speed of GOT Since the FA transparent function is used via the motion CPU, the monitor speed of GOT is slow. 22.7.
PAGE 745
[A] ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS ........ A-24 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING ................. 3-1 AnCPU type Bus connection .................................................. 5-9 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) ......................................................................... 13-6 Computer link connection ................................ 7-13 Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-9 Ethernet connection ...........................................
PAGE 746
[E] Ethernet connection............................................... 8-1 [F] FA transparent function ............................... 22-1,22-2 FXCPU Direct connection to CPU................................. 6-10 Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-9 [G] GOT connector specifications ............................. 1-26 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION .................... 19-1 GOT Side Settings Bus connection.................................................
PAGE 747
[Q] QCPU(A mode) CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) ......................................................................... 13-6 Computer link connection .................................. 7-9 Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-6 Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) ................................................................. 10-7,10-8 QCPU(Q mode) Bus connection .......................
PAGE 748
MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION ........................ 21-4 Multiple-GT14,GT12,GT11,GT10 connection function ............................................................ 20-2 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION.......... 17-2 Servo amplifier connection............................... 16-3 [T] Terminating resistors of GOT .............................. 1-30 [W] What is Multi-channel Function? .........................
PAGE 749
REVISIONS * The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover. Print Date * Manual Number Revision Oct., 2009 SH(NA)-080898ENG-A First edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.01B Nov., 2009 SH(NA)-080898ENG-B B edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.05F • Compatible with iQ Works Jan.,2010 SH(NA)-080898ENG-C C edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.
PAGE 750
* The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover. Print Date * Manual Number Revision Nov., 2012 SH(NA)-080898ENG-O Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.63R • SAFETY PRECAUTIONS is changed. • C Controller module (Q24DHCCPU-V) compatible • Inverter connection (MELIPM series) compatible • FA transparent function (MX Component 4.00A) compatible Feb., 2013 SH(NA)-080898ENG-P Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.
PAGE 751
WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product. 1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company.
PAGE 752
GOT is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server, Windows Vista, and Windows 7 are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Pentium and Celeron are a registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries. Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States.
PAGE 753
Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 (ELE) (Mitsubishi Products) MODEL SW1-GTD3-U(CON1)-ELE MODEL CODE 1D7MC9 SH(NA)-080898ENG-P(1302)MEE HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission. Specifications subject to change without notice.
PAGE 754
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. EUROPE German Branch Gothaer Straße 8 D-40880 Ratingen Phone: +49 (0)2102 / 486-0 Fax: +49 (0)2102 / 486-1120 MITSUBISHIELECTRICEUROPEB.V.-org.sl. CZECH REP. Czech Branch Radlická 751/113e CZ-158 00 Praha 5 Phone: +420 - 251 551 470 Fax: +420 - 251-551-471 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.